Jump to content
documentation.suse.com / Deployment Guide
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP2

Deployment Guide

This guide details how to install single or multiple systems, and how to exploit the product-inherent capabilities for a deployment infrastructure. Choose from various approaches: local installation from physical installation media, customizing the standard installation images, network installation server, mass deployment using a remote-controlled, highly-customized, automated installation process, and initial system configuration.

Publication Date: September 28, 2024

Copyright © 2006–2024 SUSE LLC and contributors. All rights reserved.

Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or (at your option) version 1.3; with the Invariant Section being this copyright notice and license. A copy of the license version 1.2 is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.

For SUSE trademarks, see https://www.suse.com/company/legal/. All third-party trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Trademark symbols (®, ™ etc.) denote trademarks of SUSE and its affiliates. Asterisks (*) denote third-party trademarks.

All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to detail. However, this does not guarantee complete accuracy. Neither SUSE LLC, its affiliates, the authors nor the translators shall be held liable for possible errors or the consequences thereof.

About This Guide

Installations of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are possible in different ways. It is impossible to cover all combinations of boot, or installation server, automated installations or deploying images. This manual should help with selecting the appropriate method of deployment for your installation.

Part I, “Installation Preparation”

The standard deployment instructions differ depending on the architecture used. For differences and requirements regarding the architecture, see this part.

Part II, “Installation Procedure”

Most tasks that are needed during installations are described here. This includes the manual setup of your computer and installation of additional software, and cloning disk images and performing the setup remotely.

Part III, “Customizing Installation Images”

If you need or want to modify the regular SUSE® Linux Enterprise installation images (for virtual environments, to create minimal boot images, or to customize modules, extensions, and repositories), this part describes how to do so.

Part IV, “Setting Up an Installation Server”

SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server can be installed in different ways. Apart from the usual media installation, you can choose from various network-based approaches. This part describes setting up an installation server and how to prepare the boot of the target system for installation.

Part V, “Initial System Configuration”

Learn how to configure your system after installation. This part covers common tasks like setting up hardware components, installing or removing software, managing users, or changing settings with YaST.

1 Available documentation

Online documentation

Our documentation is available online at https://documentation.suse.com. Browse or download the documentation in various formats.

Note
Note: Latest updates

The latest updates are usually available in the English-language version of this documentation.

SUSE Knowledgebase

If you have run into an issue, also check out the Technical Information Documents (TIDs) that are available online at https://www.suse.com/support/kb/. Search the SUSE Knowledgebase for known solutions driven by customer need.

Release notes

For release notes, see https://www.suse.com/releasenotes/.

In your system

For offline use, the release notes are also available under /usr/share/doc/release-notes on your system. The documentation for individual packages is available at /usr/share/doc/packages.

Many commands are also described in their manual pages. To view them, run man, followed by a specific command name. If the man command is not installed on your system, install it with sudo zypper install man.

2 Improving the documentation

Your feedback and contributions to this documentation are welcome. The following channels for giving feedback are available:

Service requests and support

For services and support options available for your product, see https://www.suse.com/support/.

To open a service request, you need a SUSE subscription registered at SUSE Customer Center. Go to https://scc.suse.com/support/requests, log in, and click Create New.

Bug reports

Report issues with the documentation at https://bugzilla.suse.com/.

To simplify this process, click the Report an issue icon next to a headline in the HTML version of this document. This preselects the right product and category in Bugzilla and adds a link to the current section. You can start typing your bug report right away.

A Bugzilla account is required.

Contributions

To contribute to this documentation, click the Edit source document icon next to a headline in the HTML version of this document. This will take you to the source code on GitHub, where you can open a pull request.

A GitHub account is required.

Note
Note: Edit source document only available for English

The Edit source document icons are only available for the English version of each document. For all other languages, use the Report an issue icons instead.

For more information about the documentation environment used for this documentation, see the repository's README.

Mail

You can also report errors and send feedback concerning the documentation to <>. Include the document title, the product version, and the publication date of the document. Additionally, include the relevant section number and title (or provide the URL) and provide a concise description of the problem.

3 Documentation conventions

The following notices and typographic conventions are used in this document:

  • /etc/passwd: Directory names and file names

  • PLACEHOLDER: Replace PLACEHOLDER with the actual value

  • PATH: An environment variable

  • ls, --help: Commands, options, and parameters

  • user: The name of a user or group

  • package_name: The name of a software package

  • Alt, AltF1: A key to press or a key combination. Keys are shown in uppercase as on a keyboard.

  • File, File › Save As: menu items, buttons

  • AMD/Intel This paragraph is only relevant for the AMD64/Intel 64 architectures. The arrows mark the beginning and the end of the text block.

    IBM Z, POWER This paragraph is only relevant for the architectures IBM Z and POWER. The arrows mark the beginning and the end of the text block.

  • Chapter 1, Example chapter: A cross-reference to another chapter in this guide.

  • Commands that must be run with root privileges. You can also prefix these commands with the sudo command to run them as a non-privileged user:

    # command
    > sudo command
  • Commands that can be run by non-privileged users:

    > command
  • Commands can be split into two or multiple lines by a backslash character (\) at the end of a line. The backslash informs the shell that the command invocation will continue after the line's end:

    > echo a b \
    c d
  • A code block that shows both the command (preceded by a prompt) and the respective output returned by the shell:

    > command
    output
  • Notices

    Warning
    Warning: Warning notice

    Vital information you must be aware of before proceeding. Warns you about security issues, potential loss of data, damage to hardware, or physical hazards.

    Important
    Important: Important notice

    Important information you should be aware of before proceeding.

    Note
    Note: Note notice

    Additional information, for example about differences in software versions.

    Tip
    Tip: Tip notice

    Helpful information, like a guideline or a piece of practical advice.

  • Compact Notices

    Note

    Additional information, for example about differences in software versions.

    Tip

    Helpful information, like a guideline or a piece of practical advice.

4 Support

Find the support statement for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server and general information about technology previews below. For details about the product lifecycle, see https://www.suse.com/lifecycle.

If you are entitled to support, find details on how to collect information for a support ticket at https://documentation.suse.com/sles-15/html/SLES-all/cha-adm-support.html.

4.1 Support statement for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

To receive support, you need an appropriate subscription with SUSE. To view the specific support offers available to you, go to https://www.suse.com/support/ and select your product.

The support levels are defined as follows:

L1

Problem determination, which means technical support designed to provide compatibility information, usage support, ongoing maintenance, information gathering and basic troubleshooting using available documentation.

L2

Problem isolation, which means technical support designed to analyze data, reproduce customer problems, isolate a problem area and provide a resolution for problems not resolved by Level 1 or prepare for Level 3.

L3

Problem resolution, which means technical support designed to resolve problems by engaging engineering to resolve product defects which have been identified by Level 2 Support.

For contracted customers and partners, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is delivered with L3 support for all packages, except for the following:

  • Technology previews.

  • Sound, graphics, fonts, and artwork.

  • Packages that require an additional customer contract.

  • Some packages shipped as part of the module Workstation Extension are L2-supported only.

  • Packages with names ending in -devel (containing header files and similar developer resources) will only be supported together with their main packages.

SUSE will only support the usage of original packages. That is, packages that are unchanged and not recompiled.

4.2 Technology previews

Technology previews are packages, stacks, or features delivered by SUSE to provide glimpses into upcoming innovations. Technology previews are included for your convenience to give you a chance to test new technologies within your environment. We would appreciate your feedback. If you test a technology preview, please contact your SUSE representative and let them know about your experience and use cases. Your input is helpful for future development.

Technology previews have the following limitations:

  • Technology previews are still in development. Therefore, they may be functionally incomplete, unstable, or otherwise not suitable for production use.

  • Technology previews are not supported.

  • Technology previews may only be available for specific hardware architectures.

  • Details and functionality of technology previews are subject to change. As a result, upgrading to subsequent releases of a technology preview may be impossible and require a fresh installation.

  • SUSE may discover that a preview does not meet customer or market needs, or does not comply with enterprise standards. Technology previews can be removed from a product at any time. SUSE does not commit to providing a supported version of such technologies in the future.

For an overview of technology previews shipped with your product, see the release notes at https://www.suse.com/releasenotes.

Part I Installation Preparation

  • 1 Planning for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
  • This chapter describes some basic considerations before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

  • 2 Installation on AMD64 and Intel 64
  • This chapter describes the steps necessary to prepare for the installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on AMD64 and Intel 64 computers. It introduces the steps required to prepare for various installation methods. The list of hardware requirements provides an overview of systems supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Find information about available installation methods and several commonly known problems. Also learn how to control the installation, provide installation media, and boot with regular methods.

  • 3 Installation on AArch64
  • This chapter describes the steps necessary to prepare for the installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on AArch64 computers. It introduces the steps required to prepare for various installation methods. The list of hardware requirements provides an overview of systems supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Find information about available installation methods and several common known problems. Also learn how to control the installation, provide installation media, and boot with regular methods.

  • 4 Installation on IBM POWER
  • This chapter describes the installation procedure of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on IBM POWER systems.

  • 5 Installation on IBM Z and LinuxONE
  • This chapter describes the procedure for preparing the installation of SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server on IBM Z. It provides all information needed to prepare the installation on the LPAR and z/VM side.

  • 6 Installation on Hardware Not Supported at Release
  • With some newer hardware, the installation medium of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server cannot boot. This can be the case when the hardware did not exist at the time of the release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. For such a situation SUSE provides Kernel Update ISO (kISO) images. This chapter describes how to use the Kernel Update to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on current hardware.

1 Planning for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

This chapter describes some basic considerations before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

1.1 Considerations for Deployment of a SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

The implementation of an operating system either in an existing IT environment or as a completely new roll out must be carefully prepared. At the beginning of the planning process, you should try to define the project goals and necessary features. This must always be done individually for each project, but the questions to answer should include the following:

  • How many installations should be done? Depending on this, the best deployment methods differ.

  • Will the system run as physical host or as a virtual machine?

  • Will the system be in a hostile environment? Have a look at Book “Security and Hardening Guide”, Chapter 1 “Security and Confidentiality” to get an overview of consequences.

  • How will you get regular updates? All patches are provided online for registered users. Find the registration and patch support database at http://download.suse.com/.

  • Do you need help for your local installation? SUSE provides training, support, and consulting for all topics pertaining to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Find more information about this at https://www.suse.com/products/server/.

  • Do you need third-party products? Make sure that the required product is also supported on the desired platform. SUSE can provide help to support software on different platforms when needed.

1.2 Deployment of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

To make sure that your system will run flawlessly, always try to use certified hardware. The hardware certification process is an ongoing process and the database of certified hardware is updated regularly. Find the search form for certified hardware at https://www.suse.com/yessearch/Search.jsp.

Depending on the number of desired installations, it is beneficial to use installation servers or even completely automatic installations. When using Xen or KVM virtualization technologies, network root file systems or network storage solutions like iSCSI should be considered.

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server provides you with a broad variety of services. Find an overview of the documentation in this book in Book “Administration Guide”, Preface “About This Guide”. Most of the needed configurations can be made with YaST, the SUSE configuration utility. In addition, many manual configurations are described in the corresponding chapters.

In addition to the plain software installation, you should consider training the end users of the systems and help desk staff.

Note
Note: Terminology

In the following sections, the system to hold your new SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation is called target system or installation target. The term repository (previously called installation source) is used for all sources of installation data. This includes physical media, such as CD, DVD, or USB flash drive, and network servers distributing the installation data in your network.

1.3 Running SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

The SUSE Linux Enterprise Server operating system is a well-tested and stable system. Unfortunately, this does not prevent hardware failures or other causes for downtime or data loss. For any serious computing task where data loss could occur, a regular backup should be done.

For optimal security and data safety, you should make regular updates of all the operated machines. If you have a mission critical server, you should run a second identical (pre-production) machine that you can use to test all changes. This also gives you the possibility of switching machines in the case of hardware failure.

1.4 Registering SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

To get technical support and product updates, you need to register and activate your SUSE product with the SUSE Customer Center. We recommend to register during the installation, since this will enable you to install the system with the latest updates and patches available. However, if you are offline or want to skip the registration step, you can register at any time later from the installed system.

In case your organization does not provide a local registration server, registering SUSE Linux Enterprise requires a SUSE Customer Center account. In case you do not have one yet, go to the SUSE Customer Center home page (https://scc.suse.com/) to create one.

During the installation you will be asked to enter your registration code. For details, see Section 8.7, “Registration”.

If you deploy your instances automatically using AutoYaST, you can register the system during the installation by providing the respective information in the AutoYaST control file. For details, see Book “AutoYaST Guide”, Chapter 4 “Configuration and Installation Options”, Section 4.3 “System Registration and Extension Selection”.

For registering an already installed system, see Section 21.2, “Registering an Installed System”.

1.5 Changes in Installation from SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Version 15

Starting with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15, all SUSE Linux Enterprise-based products on each supported architecture are installed using a Unified Installer from a single set of installation media.

1.5.1 Unified Installer for SUSE Linux Enterprise-based Products

As of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP2, this includes the following base products:

Product NameSupported Platforms
SUSE Linux Enterprise ServerAMD64/Intel 64; AArch64; POWER; IBM Z
SUSE Linux Enterprise High Performance ComputingAMD64/Intel 64; AArch64
SUSE Linux Enterprise Real TimeAMD64/Intel 64
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for SAP ApplicationsAMD64/Intel 64; POWER
SUSE Linux Enterprise DesktopAMD64/Intel 64
SUSE Manager ServerAMD64/Intel 64; POWER; IBM Z
SUSE Manager ProxyAMD64/Intel 64
SUSE Manager for Retail Branch ServerAMD64/Intel 64
SUSE Enterprise StorageAMD64/Intel 64; Arm; Intel 64

1.5.2 Installing with Internet Access

If you are installing onto a computer or VM that has access to the Internet, then to install any of the products listed above, it is only necessary to download the SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso image for the desired architecture.

Note
Note: Installing SUSE Manager

To install any SUSE Manager products, the target machine must have direct access to the SUSE Customer Center or to an RMT server.

1.5.3 Offline Installation

Except for SUSE Manager, you do not require access to the Internet, or to the SUSE Customer Center or to an RMT server, to install the other listed products.

For offline installation, additionally download the SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso image for the desired architecture.

There is an additional, second Packages medium, but this contains only source code and is not required for installation.

Tip
Tip: Full Media Size

The size of the full installation media SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso exceeds the capacity of a dual layer DVD. Therefore you can only boot it from a USB flash drive.

1.5.4 Quarterly Update Media

For the installation media and the VM Guest images, SUSE offers two variants:

  • The first, containing GM in the filename, consists of the package set as shipped at first customer shipment date.

  • The second, identified by a QU followed by a number in the filename, contains the same package set but includes all maintenance updates of the packages that have been released in the meantime. Quarterly updated media are refreshed every 3 months, with the first coming three month after the GM release.

You only need either the GM or the QU media, not both. Which to choose, the GM or the QU version, depends on your needs and preferences. If you have newer hardware, the QU version might be the better choice. The installation procedure is identical for both variants.

For both variants it is recommended to install the latest updates released since creating the images during or immediately after installation.

2 Installation on AMD64 and Intel 64

This chapter describes the steps necessary to prepare for the installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on AMD64 and Intel 64 computers. It introduces the steps required to prepare for various installation methods. The list of hardware requirements provides an overview of systems supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Find information about available installation methods and several commonly known problems. Also learn how to control the installation, provide installation media, and boot with regular methods.

2.1 Hardware Requirements

The SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server operating system can be deployed on a wide range of hardware. It is impossible to list all the different combinations of hardware SUSE Linux Enterprise Server supports. However, to provide you with a guide to help you during the planning phase, the minimum requirements are presented here.

If you want to be sure that a given computer configuration will work, find out which platforms have been certified by SUSE. Find a list at https://www.suse.com/yessearch/.

The Intel 64 and AMD64 architectures support the simple migration of x86 software to 64 bits. Like the x86 architecture, they constitute a value-for-money alternative.

CPU

All CPUs available on the market to date are supported.

Maximum Number of CPUs

The maximum number of CPUs supported by software design is 8192 for Intel 64 and AMD64. If you plan to use such a large system, verify with our hardware system certification Web page for supported devices, see https://www.suse.com/yessearch/.

Memory Requirements

A minimum of 1024 MB of memory is required for a minimal installation. On machines with more than two processors, add 512 MB per CPU. For remote installations via HTTP or FTP add another 150 MB. Note that these values are only valid for the installation of the operating system—the actual memory requirement in production depends on the system's workload.

Hard Disk Requirements

The disk requirements depend largely on the installation selected and how you use your machine. Commonly, you need more space than the installation software itself needs to have a system that works properly. Minimum requirements for different selections are:

Installation Scope

Minimum Hard Disk Requirements

Text Mode

1.5 GB

Minimal System

2.5 GB

GNOME Desktop

3 GB

All patterns

4 GB

Recommended Minimum (no Btrfs snapshots): 10 GB

Required Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 16 GB

Recommended Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 32 GB

If your root partition is smaller than 10 GB, the installer will not make an automated partitioning proposal and you need to manually create partitions. Therefore the recommended minimum size for the root partition is 10 GB. If you want to enable Btrfs snapshots on the root volume to enable system rollbacks (see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 7 “System Recovery and Snapshot Management with Snapper”) the minimum size for the root partition is 16 GB.

Boot Methods

The computer can be booted from a CD or a network. A special boot server is required to boot over the network. This can be set up with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

2.2 Installation Considerations

This section encompasses many factors that need to be considered before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on AMD64 and Intel 64 hardware.

2.2.1 Installation on Hardware or Virtual Machine

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is normally installed as an independent operating system. With virtualization it is also possible to run multiple instances of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on the same hardware. However, the installation of the VM Host Server is performed like a typical installation with some additional packages. The installation of virtual guests is described in Book “Virtualization Guide”, Chapter 8 “Guest Installation”.

2.2.2 Installation Target

Most installations are to a local hard disk. Therefore, it is necessary for the hard disk controllers to be available to the installation system. If a special controller (like a RAID controller) needs an extra kernel module, provide a kernel module update disk to the installation system.

Other installation targets may be various types of block devices that provide sufficient disk space and speed to run an operating system. This includes network block devices like iSCSI or SAN. It is also possible to install on network file systems that offer the standard Unix permissions. However, it may be problematic to boot these, because they must be supported by the initramfs before the actual system can start. Such installations can be useful when you need to start the same system in different locations or you plan to use virtualization features like domain migration.

2.3 Controlling the Installation

Control the installation in one of several ways. Boot the setup with one of the options listed in Section 2.4, “Booting the Installation System”. To enable the different control methods refer to Section 7.3.4, “Specifying Remote Access”. For information about how to use each remote control method, refer to Chapter 11, Remote Installation.

A brief overview of the different methods:

Local with Monitor and Keyboard

This is the method most frequently used to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. This also requires the smallest preparation effort but requires a lot of direct interaction.

Remote via SSH

You can control the installation via SSH either in text mode or use X-forwarding for a graphical installation. For details refer to Section 11.4, “Monitoring Installation via SSH”.

Remote via Serial Console

For this installation method you need a second computer connected by a null modem cable to the computer on which to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. The installation then proceeds in text mode. For details refer to Section 11.5, “Monitoring Installation via Serial Console”.

Remote via VNC

Use this method if you want a graphical installation without direct access to the target machine. For details refer to Section 11.3, “Monitoring Installation via VNC”.

Automatic via AutoYaST

If you need to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on several computers with similar hardware, it is recommended you perform the installations with the aid of AutoYaST. In this case, start by installing one SUSE Linux Enterprise Server and use this to create the necessary AutoYaST configuration files. For details refer to Book “AutoYaST Guide”.

2.4 Booting the Installation System

This section gives an overview of the steps required for the complete installation of SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server.

Unlike previous SLE products, the entire SLE 15 SP2 product line can be installed using the Unified Installer. For details about the changes since SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 and which media to download for installation, see Section 1.5, “Changes in Installation from SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Version 15”.

For a full description of how to install and configure the system with YaST, refer to Part II, “Installation Procedure”.

Important
Important: Hardware Support Updates

When using very recent hardware, it can be necessary to boot the installation with a newer kernel from a Kernel Update ISO image. For details, refer to Chapter 6, Installation on Hardware Not Supported at Release.

  1. Prepare the installation media.

    USB Flash Drive

    This is the simplest way to start the installation. To create a bootable flash disk, you need to copy a DVD image to the device using the dd command. The flash disk must not be mounted, and all data on the device will be erased.

    # dd if=PATH_TO_ISO_IMAGE of=USB_STORAGE_DEVICE bs=4M
    Network Booting

    If the target computer's firmware supports it, you can boot the computer from the network and install from a server. This booting method requires a boot server that provides the needed boot images over the network. The exact protocol depends on your hardware. Commonly you need several services, such as TFTP and DHCP or PXE boot. For details, read Chapter 17, Preparing Network Boot Environment.

    It is possible to install from many common network protocols, such as NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB. For more information on how to perform such an installation, refer to Chapter 11, Remote Installation.

  2. Configure the target system firmware to boot the medium you chose. Refer to the documentation of your hardware vendor about how to configure the correct boot order.

  3. Set the boot parameters required for your installation method. An overview of the different methods is provided in Section 2.3, “Controlling the Installation”. A list of boot parameters is available in Chapter 7, Boot Parameters.

  4. Perform the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps. The system needs to restart after the installation is finished.

  5. Optional: Change the boot order of the system to directly boot from the medium to which SUSE Linux Enterprise Server has been installed. If the system boots from the installation medium, the first boot parameter will be to boot the installed system.

  6. Perform the initial system configuration as described in Part V, “Initial System Configuration”.

2.5 Dealing with Boot and Installation Problems

Prior to delivery, SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server is subjected to an extensive test program. Despite this, problems occasionally occur during boot or installation.

2.5.1 Problems Booting

Boot problems may prevent the YaST installer from starting on your system. Another symptom is when your system does not boot after the installation has been completed.

Installed System Boots, Not Media

Change your computer's firmware or BIOS so that the boot sequence is correct. To do this, consult the manual for your hardware.

The Computer Hangs

Change the console on your computer so that the kernel outputs are visible. Be sure to check the last outputs. This is normally done by pressing CtrlAltF10. If you cannot resolve the problem, consult the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server support staff. To log all system messages at boot time, use a serial connection as described in Section 2.3, “Controlling the Installation”.

Boot Disk

The boot disk is a useful interim solution if you have difficulties setting the other configurations or if you want to postpone the decision regarding the final boot mechanism. For more details on creating boot disks, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 14 “The Boot Loader GRUB 2” grub2-mkrescue.

Virus Warning after Installation

There are BIOS variants that check the structure of the boot sector (MBR) and erroneously display a virus warning after the installation of GRUB 2. Solve this problem by entering the BIOS and looking for corresponding adjustable settings. For example, switch off virus protection. You can switch this option back on again later. It is unnecessary, however, if Linux is the only operating system you use.

2.5.2 Problems Installing

If an unexpected problem occurs during installation, information is needed to determine the cause of the problem. Use the following directions to help with troubleshooting:

  • Check the outputs on the various consoles. You can switch consoles with the key combination CtrlAltFn. For example, obtain a shell in which to execute various commands by pressing CtrlAltF2.

  • Try launching the installation with Safe Settings (press F5 on the installation screen and choose Safe Settings). If the installation works without problems in this case, there is an incompatibility that causes either ACPI or APIC to fail. In some cases, a BIOS or firmware update fixes this problem.

  • Check the system messages on a console in the installation system by entering the command dmesg -T.

2.5.3 Redirecting the Boot Source to the Installation Medium

To simplify the installation process and avoid accidental installations, the default setting on the installation medium for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is that your system is booted from the first hard disk. At this point, an installed boot loader normally takes over control of the system. This means that the boot medium can stay in the drive during the installation. To start the installation, choose one of the installation possibilities in the boot menu of the media.

3 Installation on AArch64

This chapter describes the steps necessary to prepare for the installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on AArch64 computers. It introduces the steps required to prepare for various installation methods. The list of hardware requirements provides an overview of systems supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Find information about available installation methods and several common known problems. Also learn how to control the installation, provide installation media, and boot with regular methods.

3.1 Hardware Requirements

The SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server operating system can be deployed on a wide range of hardware. It is impossible to list all the different combinations of hardware SUSE Linux Enterprise Server supports. However, to provide you with a guide to help you during the planning phase, the minimum requirements are presented here.

If you want to be sure that a given computer configuration will work, find out which platforms have been certified by SUSE. Find a list at https://www.suse.com/yessearch/.

CPU

The minimum requirement is a CPU that supports the Armv8-A instruction set architecture (ISA), for example, Arm Cortex-A53 or Cortex-A57. Refer to https://www.arm.com/products/processors/cortex-a/ for a list of available Armv8-A processors.

CPUs with the Armv8-R (realtime) and Armv8-M (microcontroller) ISA are currently not supported.

Maximum Number of CPUs

The maximum number of CPUs supported by software design is 256. If you plan to use such a large system, check our hardware system certification Web page for supported devices, see https://www.suse.com/yessearch/.

Memory Requirements

A minimum of 1024 MB of memory is required for a minimal installation. On machines with more than two processors, add 512 MB per CPU. For remote installations via HTTP or FTP add another 150 MB. Note that these values are only valid for the installation of the operating system—the actual memory requirement in production depends on the system's workload.

Hard Disk Requirements

The disk requirements depend largely on the installation selected and how you use your machine. Commonly, you need more space than the installation software itself needs to have a system that works properly. Minimum requirements for different selections are:

Installation Scope

Minimum Hard Disk Requirements

Text Mode

1.5 GB

Minimal System

2.5 GB

GNOME Desktop

3 GB

All patterns

4 GB

Recommended Minimum (no Btrfs snapshots): 10 GB

Required Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 16 GB

Recommended Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 32 GB

If your root partition is smaller than 10 GB, the installer will not make an automated partitioning proposal and you need to manually create partitions. Therefore the recommended minimum size for the root partition is 10 GB. If you want to enable Btrfs snapshots on the root volume to enable system rollbacks (see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 7 “System Recovery and Snapshot Management with Snapper”) the minimum size for the root partition is 16 GB.

Boot Methods

The computer can be booted from a CD or a network. A special boot server is required to boot over the network. This can be set up with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

3.2 Installation Considerations

This section encompasses many factors that need to be considered before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on AArch64 hardware.

3.2.1 Installation on Hardware or Virtual Machine

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is normally installed as an independent operating system. With virtualization it is also possible to run multiple instances of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on the same hardware. However, the installation of the VM Host Server is performed like a typical installation with some additional packages. The installation of virtual guests is described in Book “Virtualization Guide”, Chapter 8 “Guest Installation”.

3.2.2 Installation Target

Most installations are to a local hard disk. Therefore, it is necessary for the hard disk controllers to be available to the installation system. If a special controller (like a RAID controller) needs an extra kernel module, provide a kernel module update disk to the installation system.

Other installation targets may be various types of block devices that provide sufficient disk space and speed to run an operating system. This includes network block devices like iSCSI or SAN. It is also possible to install on network file systems that offer the standard Unix permissions. However, it may be problematic to boot these, because they must be supported by the initramfs before the actual system can start. Such installations can be useful when you need to start the same system in different locations or you plan to use virtualization features like domain migration.

3.3 Controlling the Installation

Control the installation in one of several ways. Boot the setup with one of the options listed in Section 2.4, “Booting the Installation System”. To enable the different control methods refer to Section 7.3.4, “Specifying Remote Access”. For information about how to use each remote control method, refer to Chapter 11, Remote Installation.

A brief overview of the different methods:

Local with Monitor and Keyboard

This is the method most frequently used to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. This also requires the smallest preparation effort but requires a lot of direct interaction.

Remote via SSH

You can control the installation via SSH either in text mode or use X-forwarding for a graphical installation. For details refer to Section 11.4, “Monitoring Installation via SSH”.

Remote via Serial Console

For this installation method you need a second computer connected by a null modem cable to the computer on which to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. The installation then proceeds in text mode. For details refer to Section 11.5, “Monitoring Installation via Serial Console”.

Remote via VNC

Use this method if you want a graphical installation without direct access to the target machine. For details refer to Section 11.3, “Monitoring Installation via VNC”.

Automatic via AutoYaST

If you need to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on several computers with similar hardware, it is recommended you perform the installations with the aid of AutoYaST. In this case, start by installing one SUSE Linux Enterprise Server and use this to create the necessary AutoYaST configuration files. For details refer to Book “AutoYaST Guide”.

3.4 Booting the Installation System

This section gives an overview of the steps required for the complete installation of SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server.

Unlike previous SLE products, the entire SLE 15 SP2 product line can be installed using the Unified Installer. For details about the changes since SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 and which media to download for installation, see Section 1.5, “Changes in Installation from SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Version 15”.

For a full description of how to install and configure the system with YaST, refer to Part II, “Installation Procedure”.

Important
Important: Hardware Support Updates

When using very recent hardware, it can be necessary to boot the installation with a newer kernel from a Kernel Update ISO image. For details, refer to Chapter 6, Installation on Hardware Not Supported at Release.

  1. Prepare the installation media.

    USB Flash Drive

    This is the simplest way to start the installation. To create a bootable flash disk, you need to copy a DVD image to the device using the dd command. The flash disk must not be mounted, and all data on the device will be erased.

    # dd if=PATH_TO_ISO_IMAGE of=USB_STORAGE_DEVICE bs=4M
    DVD

    DVD media are available from SUSE, or you can make your own. This method is useful if you have multiple machines to provision at the same time. It requires either a built-in or removable DVD drive. The process is straightforward for most computer users, but requires a lot of interaction for every installation process. If you did not receive a DVD, get the ISO image from the SUSE home page and burn it to a blank, writable DVD.

    Network Booting

    If the target computer's firmware supports it, you can boot the computer from the network and install from a server. This booting method requires a boot server that provides the needed boot images over the network. The exact protocol depends on your hardware. Commonly you need several services, such as TFTP and DHCP or PXE boot. For details, read Chapter 17, Preparing Network Boot Environment.

    It is possible to install from many common network protocols, such as NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB. For more information on how to perform such an installation, refer to Chapter 11, Remote Installation.

  2. Configure the target system firmware to boot the medium you chose. Refer to the documentation of your hardware vendor about how to configure the correct boot order.

  3. Set the boot parameters required for your installation method. An overview of the different methods is provided in Section 3.3, “Controlling the Installation”. A list of boot parameters is available in Chapter 7, Boot Parameters.

  4. Perform the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps. The system needs to restart after the installation is finished.

  5. Optional: Change the boot order of the system to directly boot from the medium to which SUSE Linux Enterprise Server has been installed. If the system boots from the installation medium, the first boot parameter will be to boot the installed system.

  6. Perform the initial system configuration as described in Part V, “Initial System Configuration”.

3.5 Dealing with Boot and Installation Problems

Although SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server undergoes an extensive test program, problems may occasionally occur during boot or installation.

3.5.1 Problems Booting

Boot problems may prevent the YaST installer from starting on your system. Another symptom is failure to boot after the installation has been completed.

Installed System Boots, Not Media

Change your computer's firmware so that the boot sequence is correct. To do this, consult the manual for your hardware.

The Computer Hangs

Change the console on your computer so that the kernel outputs are visible. Be sure to check the last few lines of output. This is normally done by pressing CtrlAltF10. If you cannot resolve the problem, consult the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server support staff. To log all system messages at boot time, use a serial connection as described in Section 2.3, “Controlling the Installation”.

Boot Disk

The boot disk is a useful interim solution for boot issues. If you have difficulties setting the other configurations, or if you want to postpone the decision regarding the final boot mechanism, use a boot disk. For more details on creating boot disks, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 14 “The Boot Loader GRUB 2” grub2-mkrescue.

3.5.2 Problems Installing

If an unexpected problem occurs during installation, information is needed to determine the cause of the problem. Use the following directions to help with troubleshooting:

  • Check the outputs on the various consoles. You can switch consoles with the key combination CtrlAltFn. For example, obtain a shell in which to execute various commands by pressing CtrlAltF2.

  • Try launching the installation with Safe Settings (press F5 on the installation screen and choose Safe Settings). If the installation works without problems in this case, there is an incompatibility that causes either ACPI or APIC to fail. In some cases, a firmware update fixes this problem.

  • Check the system messages on a console in the installation system by entering the command dmesg -T.

3.5.3 Redirecting the Boot Source to the Boot DVD

To simplify the installation process and avoid accidental installations, the default setting on the installation DVD for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is that your system is booted from the first hard disk. At this point, an installed boot loader normally takes over control of the system. This means that the boot DVD can stay in the drive during an installation. To start the installation, choose one of the installation possibilities in the boot menu of the media.

3.6 Raspberry Pi

SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server is the first enterprise Linux distribution to support the inexpensive Raspberry Pi* single-board computer. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP2 supports the following models:

  • Raspberry Pi 3 Model A+

  • Raspberry Pi 3 Model B

  • Raspberry Pi 3 Model B+

  • Raspberry Pi 4 Model B

  • Raspberry Pi Compute Module 3

  • Raspberry Pi Compute Module 3+

The Raspberry Pi differs from more conventional server machines in several ways. First and foremost, it does not come with a boot loader capable of loading operating systems. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server therefore ships additional boot loader software to fill that gap.

3.6.1 Boot Process

The primary processor on the Raspberry Pi's System-on-Chip (SoC) is the Broadcom VideoCore Graphics Processing Unit (GPU), not the Arm Central Processing Unit (CPU). It is the GPU which starts initializing the hardware from a first-stage boot loader in the on-chip Boot Read-Only Memory (Boot ROM). Only a few configuration options can influence the Boot ROM; see Section 3.6.1.2, “OTP Memory”.

The Raspberry Pi 3 hardware does not have any built-in firmware. Instead, its second-stage boot loader firmware bootcode.bin is loaded from the boot medium every time the machine is powered on. It in turn loads the third-stage boot loader start.elf.

The Raspberry Pi 4 hardware has a small Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) for the second-stage boot loader. Apart from that, its boot sequence is similar to that of the Raspberry Pi 3, loading the third-stage boot loader start4.elf from the boot medium.

Warning
Warning: EEPROM Update on Raspberry Pi 4

An update of the second-stage boot loader can be performed by booting from a specially prepared microSD card.

Only insert boot media that you trust, and verify that no file called recovery.bin is unintentionally present.

If an armstub8.bin file is present, it will be loaded as a fourth-stage boot loader at AArch64 Exception Level 3 (EL3). Otherwise, a minimal integrated stub will be used.

Note
Note: EL3 Security Considerations

Code loaded for EL3 (often called BL31) will reside in memory, and Linux may attempt hypercalls into EL3 throughout its runtime.

Verify that your boot media have no armstub8.bin file unintentionally present. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP2 does not include it.

Beware that the Raspberry Pi's SoC does not provide TrustZone secure memory. Both the OS on the CPU and any software on the GPU may access its RAM. It is therefore unsuited for cryptographic EL0-s applications. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server does not provide an EL1-s Trusted Execution Environment (TEE) for that reason.

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for the Raspberry Pi is configured to load a fifth-stage boot loader called Das U-Boot.

3.6.1.1 Config.txt

There is no non-volatile memory to hold configuration information. This means there are no conventional settings to adjust for boot device order, time and date, and so on.

Instead, the boot loader reads a configuration file config.txt from the boot medium. The config.txt provided by SUSE should not be modified. It allows the user to optionally provide an extraconfig.txt file, which can override any setting from config.txt if needed. This permits SUSE Linux Enterprise Server to update the config.txt file when needed, without overwriting any user settings.

3.6.1.2 OTP Memory

The SoC also has a very small amount of One-Time Programmable Memory (OTP memory). This can be used to configure some settings, such as whether the Boot ROM should attempt to boot from USB devices or over Ethernet.

This OTP memory is described on the Raspberry Pi Foundation Web site: https://www.raspberrypi.org/documentation/hardware/raspberrypi/otpbits.md

Warning
Warning: One-Time Programmable Only

Configuration settings written into OTP memory cannot be reversed.

The most common use case for OTP memory will be enabling USB boot on Raspberry Pi 3 Model B or Compute Module 3.

3.6.1.2.1 Enabling USB Boot Mode for Raspberry Pi 3 Model B

To permanently allow booting from connected USB mass storage devices on Raspberry Pi 3 Model B, and from its on-board USB Ethernet, prepare a microSD card as described in Section 3.6.3, “Deploying an Appliance Image”. Before unmounting or ejecting the card and booting from it, add to its FAT partition a text file extraconfig.txt (Section 3.6.1.1, “Config.txt”) with the following setting:

program_usb_boot_mode=1

Then continue to boot from the modified microSD card as usual. Once you see output from the U-Boot or GRUB boot loaders or the Linux kernel, you can remove power and then the microSD card. Your device should now be able to boot from USB (Section 3.6.4, “Installation from USB Media”).

Note that once USB boot mode has been enabled for Raspberry Pi 3 Model B, USB boot mode cannot be disabled again (Section 3.6.1.2, “OTP Memory”).

For more details, refer to the Raspberry Pi Foundation Web site: https://www.raspberrypi.org/documentation/hardware/raspberrypi/bootmodes/msd.md

For the Raspberry Pi Compute Module 3, the setting required is the same, but the deployment of the modified image is a little more complicated.

3.6.2 Lack of a Real-Time Clock

There is no battery-backed Real-Time Clock (RTC) on the Raspberry Pi itself.

Note
Note: Time Synchronization

The lack of a Real-Time Clock means that Raspberry Pi devices need to be configured to fetch the time from a network server by Network Time Protocol.

However, base boards for the Raspberry Pi Compute Modules may feature an RTC.

It is also possible to connect an RTC via the GPIO connector, using Hardware Attached on Top (HATs) or other expansion boards.

Either way, check whether the respective RTC chipset is supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. The connected RTC will need to be described to the operating system via a Device Tree Overlay (Section 3.6.1.1, “Config.txt”). For example, the MyPi base board might use:

dtparam=i2c1=on
dtoverlay=i2c-rtc,ds1307

3.6.3 Deploying an Appliance Image

The most common method to deploy an operating system onto Raspberry Pi hardware is to copy a pre-installed system image onto a boot medium, usually a microSD card. This is the simplest and easiest method.

SUSE provides a preconfigured bootable image of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for Raspberry Pi hardware. This comes with the Btrfs file system, with compression enabled to improve performance and reduce wear on microSD media.

A microSD card with a minimum size of 8 GB is recommended. Faster cards will give better system performance. On the first boot, the operating system automatically expands the file system to fill the card. This means that the first boot will be substantially slower than subsequent boots.

The process of writing the card image onto microSD media is described in the Raspberry Pi Quick Start.

3.6.4 Installation from USB Media

Some models of Raspberry Pi allow booting from USB mass storage devices. This will then allow deploying SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on Raspberry Pi similar to server platforms.

Installation can be performed from a removable USB medium, such as a memory stick, onto a microSD card in the machine's internal slot. Alternatively, it can be performed from a removable USB medium onto another USB medium, such as a USB-connected hard disk.

Note
Note: USB Bandwidth Limitations

Note that the Ethernet controller on the Raspberry Pi 3 is connected to the device's on-board USB 2.0 bus.

Therefore an operating system running from a disk attached via USB must share the total 480 Mbps bandwidth of the USB 2.0 controller. This will limit performance, and could significantly impact network performance.

This limitation does not apply to the Raspberry Pi 4.

Newer models of Raspberry Pi 3 with BCM2837 B0 silicon (silver instead of black chip), including Raspberry Pi 3 Model B+ and Compute Module 3+, allow booting from USB-connected storage devices by default.

On older models, such as Raspberry Pi 3 Model B or Compute Module 3, USB boot can be enabled by booting from a specially prepared microSD card once. See Section 3.6.1.2, “OTP Memory” for instructions.

3.6.5 Installation from Network

Because of the hardware's lack of on-board firmware (Section 3.6.1, “Boot Process”), network-booting the Raspberry Pi using PXE is more complex than with more conventional computers.

The process of setting up a PXE boot server for x86 and Arm is described in the SUSE Best Practices document How to Set Up a Multi-PXE Installation Server.

The Raspberry Pi Foundation publishes information on how to boot using PXE one Raspberry Pi from another Raspberry Pi: https://www.raspberrypi.org/documentation/hardware/raspberrypi/bootmodes/net_tutorial.md

3.6.6 For More Information

For more information, consult the following resources:

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP2 Release Notes

For more information about hardware compatibility, supported options and functionality when running on Raspberry Pi hardware, consult the Boot and Driver Enablement for Raspberry Pi section of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Release Notes:

https://www.suse.com/releasenotes/aarch64/SUSE-SLES/15-SP2/#aarch64-rpi

Raspberry Pi Quick Start

https://documentation.suse.com/sles/15-SP2/html/SLES-rpi-quick/art-rpiquick.html

openSUSE Hardware Compatibility List: Raspberry Pi 3

The openSUSE project also has information about installing and configuring Raspberry Pi hardware. Much of this also applies to SUSE Linux Enterprise.

See https://en.opensuse.org/HCL:Raspberry_Pi3.

Das U-Boot

More information about Das U-Boot boot loader can be found on the project's GitHub page at https://github.com/u-boot/u-boot.

4 Installation on IBM POWER

This chapter describes the installation procedure of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on IBM POWER systems.

4.1 Hardware Requirements

To run SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on POWER, your hardware must meet the minimum requirements listed below.

Supported Servers

Check the database of SUSE-certified hardware to make sure that your particular hardware configuration is supported. The database is available at https://www.suse.com/yessearch/Search.jsp. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server may support additional IBM POWER systems that are not listed. For the latest information, refer to the IBM Information Center for Linux at https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/linuxonibm/liaam/liaamdistros.htm.

Memory Requirements

A minimum of 1024 MB of RAM is required for a minimal installation. For remote installations via HTTP or FTP, add another 150 MB. Note that these values are only valid for the installation of the operating system—the actual amount of RAM depends on the system's workload.

Hard Disk Requirements

The disk requirements depend on the type of installation selected and the usage scenario. Normally, a properly working system requires more space than the installation itself. The minimum requirements are as follows.

Installation Scope

Minimum Hard Disk Requirements

Text Mode

1.5 GB

Minimal System

2.5 GB

GNOME Desktop

3 GB

All patterns

4 GB

Recommended Minimum (no Btrfs snapshots): 10 GB

Required Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 16 GB

Recommended Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 32 GB

If the root partition is smaller than 10 GB, the installer does not offer a partitioning proposal. In this case, you need to create partitions manually. To avoid this, we recommend to have 10 GB reserved for the root partition. Increase the minimum size to 16 GB if you plan to enable Btrfs snapshots on the root volume (see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 7 “System Recovery and Snapshot Management with Snapper”).

Before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, make sure that the server has the latest firmware. For the latest firmware, visit IBM FixCentral: https://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/. Select your system from the Product Group list. Additional software is available from the IBM PowerLinux Tools Repository. For more information on using the IBM PowerLinux Tools Repository, see https://ibm.co/3v6LuKp.

4.2 Installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for POWER

The following procedure describes how to set up an installation environment. You can skip it if you already have an installation environment ready.

Procedure 4.1: Preparing an Installation Environment
  1. Start an SSH session to your HMC and run the vtmenu command.

  2. Select the desired POWER server and the LPAR. If a serial console session for the chosen LPAR already exists, you need to close it first using the following command:

    rmvterm -m SERVER -p LPAR
  3. Reboot the LPAR by creating a new SSH session to the HMC and running the following command:

    chsysstate -r lpar -m SERVER -o shutdown -n LPAR --immed --restart

    Note that this command causes a hard reboot of the LPAR. To perform a soft reboot and allow the running tasks to shut down properly, omit the --immed flag on the command above.

  4. When prompted, press 1 in the serial console to open the SMS Menu.

    Choose SMS Menu
  5. Select Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program Load) by pressing 2 and Enter.

    Choose Setup Remote IPL
  6. Select the NIC Adapter for accessing your TFTP server.

  7. Select the IP version to be used (for example, IPv4).

  8. Select the protocol used to access the TFTP server (for example, 1 for BOOTP).

  9. Select IP Parameters by pressing 1 and Enter.

  10. Configure the required network parameters of the LPAR, including the IP address, the network gateway, and the network mask. In the Server IP Address, specify the IP address of your TFTP server.

    Configure network parameters
  11. Use the Esc key to return to the first screen. Select the following entries in the specified order:

    • Select Boot Options

    • Select Install/Boot Device

    • Network

    • BOOTP

  12. Select the NIC adapter specified earlier, then choose:

    • Normal Mode Boot

    • Yes

  13. When the process starts, you should see a GRUB menu containing a list of images available on the TFTP server.

    GRUB menu

4.3 Installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

In general, installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on POWER is similar to a regular installation procedure.

Procedure 4.2: SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation
  1. In the first two steps, you are prompted to choose the desired language and keyboard and to read and agree to the product's license agreement.

  2. Next, choose the desired product registration method and complete the registration. If you register the system using the SUSE Customer Center, you are prompted to enable update repositories. Press Yes.

    Registering the product
  3. If you want to install any modules or extensions, select each one using the arrow keys and pressing Space. Depending on what extensions and modules you select, you may be prompted to import GnuPG keys for the associated repositories.

    Selecting extensions and modules
  4. Install the desired add-on products. If you choose to install an add-on, you need to specify the installation source for it.

    Installing add-on products
  5. Specify a partition scheme for your installation. To accept the default proposal, press Next or press AltN.

    Specifying a partition scheme
  6. Choose the system role suitable for your particular scenario.

    Choosing a system role
  7. The next few screens allow you to specify the appropriate time zone, and create a user. If you choose not to create a user, you are prompted to specify a root password.

  8. In the installation summary screen, make sure the SSH service is enabled and open an SSH port. To do this, press Change, go to the Basic Firewall and SSH Configuration screen, and enable the appropriate options. Press OK.

    Configuring SSH settings
  9. Confirm the installation configuration, and press Install to start the installation process.

4.4 Further Information

Further information on IBM PowerLinux is available from SUSE and IBM:

  • The SUSE Support Knowledge Base at https://www.suse.com/support/kb/ is a help tool for assisting customers in solving problems. Search the knowledge base on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server using relevant search terms.

  • Find security alerts at https://www.suse.com/support/security/. SUSE also maintains two security-related mailing lists:

    • suse-security — General discussion of security topics related to Linux and SUSE. All security alerts for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are sent to this list.

    • suse-security-announce — The SUSE mailing list exclusively for security alerts.

  • In case of hardware errors, check the control panel for any codes. You can look up codes at the IBM Power Systems Hardware Information Center at https://ibm.co/3hsBDdP.

  • For troubleshooting tips, see the IBM PowerLinux FAQ topic in the Information Center at https://ibm.co/3hwGmLC.

  • To participate in the linuxppc-dev mailing list, register using the forms at http://lists.ozlabs.org/listinfo/linuxppc-dev/.

5 Installation on IBM Z and LinuxONE

This chapter describes the procedure for preparing the installation of SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server on IBM Z. It provides all information needed to prepare the installation on the LPAR and z/VM side.

5.1 System Requirements

This section provides basic information about the system requirements, level of MicroCode, and software. It also covers the different installation types and how to do an IPL for the first installation. For detailed technical information about IBM Z on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, refer to https://developer.ibm.com/technologies/linux/.

5.1.1 Hardware

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server runs on the following platforms:

  • IBM zEnterprise EC12 (zEC12) (2827)

  • IBM zEnterprise BC12 (zBC12) (2828)

  • IBM z13 (2964)

  • IBM z13s (2965)

  • IBM LinuxONE Emperor (2964)

  • IBM LinuxONE Rockhopper (2965)

  • IBM z14 (3906)

  • IBM z14 ZR1 (3907)

  • IBM z Systems z15 (8561)

  • IBM LinuxONE Emperor II (3906)

  • IBM LinuxONE Rockhopper II (3907)

  • IBM LinuxONE Rockhopper III (8561)

5.1.1.1 Memory Requirements

Different installation methods have different memory requirements during installation. At least 1 GB of memory is recommended for the text-mode installation under z/VM, LPAR, and KVM. Installation in the graphical mode requires at least 1.5 GB of memory.

Note
Note: Memory Requirements with Remote Installation Sources

A minimum of 512 MB of memory is required for installation from NFS, FTP, and SMB installation sources, or when VNC is used. Keep in mind that memory requirements also depend on the number of devices visible to the z/VM guest or the LPAR image. Installation with many accessible devices (even if unused for the installation) may require more memory.

5.1.1.2 Disk Space Requirements

The disk requirements depend largely on the installation. To have a properly functioning system, you normally need more space than required by the installation software. Minimal requirements for the available installation types are as follows:

Installation Type

Minimum Hard Disk Requirements

Text Mode

1.5 GB

Minimal System

2.5 GB

GNOME Desktop

3 GB

All patterns

4 GB

Recommended Minimum (no Btrfs snapshots): 10 GB

Required Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 16 GB

Recommended Minimum (with Btrfs snapshots): 32 GB

5.1.1.3 Network Connection

A network connection is needed to communicate with your SUSE Linux Enterprise Server system. This can be one or several of the following connections or network cards:

  • OSA Express Ethernet (including Fast and Gigabit Ethernet)

  • HiperSockets or Guest LAN

  • 10 GBE, VSWITCH

  • RoCE (RDMA over Converged Ethernet)

The following interfaces are still included, but no longer supported:

  • CTC (or virtual CTC)

  • ESCON

  • IP network interface for IUCV

For installations under KVM, make sure the following requirements are met to enable the VM Guest to access the network transparently:

  • The virtual network interface is connected to a host network interface.

  • The host network interface is connected to a network that the virtual server will join.

  • If the host is configured to have a redundant network connection by grouping two independent OSA network ports into a bonded network interface, the identifier for the bonded network interface is bond0. If more than one bonded interface exists, it is bond1, bond2, etc.

  • A non-redundant network connection setup requires the identifier of the single network interface. The identifier has the following format: enccw0.0.NNNN, where NNNN is the device number of the desired network interface.

5.1.2 MicroCode Level, APARs, and Fixes

Documentation about restrictions and requirements for this release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server be found on IBM developerWorks at https://developer.ibm.com/technologies/linux/. We recommend to use the highest service level available. Contact IBM support for minimum requirements.

For z/VM, the following versions are supported:

  • z/VM 6.4

  • z/VM 7.1

Since it might be necessary to activate the VM APARs before installing the new MicroCode levels, clarify the order of installation with IBM support.

5.1.3 Software

When installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server via non-Linux–based NFS or FTP, you might experience problems with NFS or FTP server software. The Windows* standard FTP server can cause errors, so we recommend performing installation via SMB on these machines.

To connect to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system, one of the following methods is required (SSH or VNC are recommended):

SSH with Terminal Emulation (xterm compatible)

SSH is a standard Unix tool that is present on most Unix or Linux systems. For Windows, you can use the Putty SSH client.

VNC Client

For Linux, the vncviewer VNC client is included in SUSE Linux Enterprise Server as part of the tightvnc package. For Windows, TightVNC is also available. Download it from https://www.tightvnc.com/.

X Server

Find a suitable X server implementation on any Linux or Unix workstation. There are many commercial X Window System environments for Windows and macOS*. Some can be downloaded as free trial versions.

Tip
Tip: Additional Information

Before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on IBM Z, consult the README file located in the root directory of the first installation medium of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

5.2 General Information

This section provides basic information about the system requirements, level of MicroCode, and software. It also covers the different installation types and how to do an IPL for the first installation. For detailed technical information about IBM Z on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, refer to https://developer.ibm.com/technologies/linux/.

5.2.1 System Requirements

This section provides a list of hardware for IBM Z supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Next, the level of the MicroCode (MCL) used in your IBM Z system, which is very important for the installation, is covered. Additional software to install and use for installation is mentioned at the end of this section.

5.2.1.1 Hardware

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server runs on the following platforms:

  • IBM zEnterprise System z196 (2817)

  • IBM zEnterprise System z114 (2818)

  • IBM zEnterprise EC12 (zEC12) (2827)

  • IBM zEnterprise BC12 (zBC12) (2828)

  • IBM z Systems z13 (2964)

  • IBM z Systems z13s (2965)

  • IBM z Systems z14 (3906)

  • IBM z Systems z14 ZR1 (3907)

  • IBM z Systems z15 (8561)

  • IBM LinuxONE Emperor (2964)

  • IBM LinuxONE Rockhopper (2965)

  • IBM LinuxONE Emperor II (3906)

  • IBM LinuxONE Rockhopper II (3907)

  • IBM LinuxONE Emperor III (8561)

5.2.1.1.1 Memory Requirements

Different installation methods have different memory requirements during installation. After installation is completed, the system administrator may reduce memory to the desired size. At least 1 GB of memory is recommended for the text-mode installation under z/VM, LPAR, and KVM. Installation in the graphical mode requires at least 1.5 GB of memory.

Note
Note: Memory Requirements with Remote Installation Sources

A minimum of 512 MB of memory is required for installation from NFS, FTP, and SMB installation sources, or when VNC is used. Keep in mind that the number of devices visible to the z/VM guest or LPAR image affects memory requirements. Installation with many accessible devices (even if unused for the installation) may require more memory.

5.2.1.1.2 Disk Space Requirements

The disk requirements depend largely on the installation. Commonly, you need more space than the installation software itself needs to have a system that works properly. Minimal requirements for different selections are:

800 MB

Minimal Installation

1.4 GB

Minimal Installation + Base System

2.6 GB

Default Installation

3.6 GB+

Recommended (this is with graphical desktop, development packages, and Java).

5.2.1.1.3 Network Connection

A network connection is required in order to communicate with your SUSE Linux Enterprise Server system. This can be one or several of the following connections or network cards:

  • OSA Express Ethernet (including Fast and Gigabit Ethernet)

  • HiperSockets or Guest LAN

  • 10 GBE, VSWITCH

  • RoCE (RDMA over Converged Ethernet)

The following interfaces are still included, but no longer supported:

  • CTC (or virtual CTC)

  • ESCON

  • IP network interface for IUCV

For installations under KVM, make sure the following requirements are met to enable the VM Guest to access the network transparently:

  • The virtual network interface is connected to a host network interface.

  • The host network interface is connected to a network that the virtual server will join.

  • If the host is configured to have a redundant network connection by grouping two independent OSA network ports into a bonded network interface, the identifier for the bonded network interface is bond0. If more than one bonded interface exists, it is bond1, bond2 etc.

  • A non-redundant network connection setup requires the identifier of the single network interface. The identifier has the following format: enccw0.0.NNNN, where NNNN is the device number of the desired network interface.

5.2.1.2 MicroCode Level, APARs, and Fixes

Documentation about restrictions and requirements for this release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server can be found on IBM developerWorks at https://developer.ibm.com/. It is recommended always to use the highest service level available. Contact your IBM support for minimum requirements.

5.2.1.2.1 z/VM
  • z/VM 6.3: we strongly suggest installing the APAR VM65419 (or higher) to improve the output of qclib.

  • z/VM 6.4

  • z/VM 7.1

Negotiate the order of installation with your IBM support, because it might be necessary to activate the VM APARs before installing the new MicroCode levels.

5.2.1.3 Software

When installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server via non-Linux–based NFS or FTP, you might experience problems with NFS or FTP server software. The Windows* standard FTP server can cause errors, so installing via SMB on these machines is generally recommended.

To connect to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system, one of the following methods is required (SSH or VNC are recommended):

SSH with Terminal Emulation (xterm compatible)

SSH is a standard Unix tool that is present on most Unix or Linux systems. For Windows, you can use the Putty SSH client.

VNC Client

For Linux, the vncviewer VNC client is included in SUSE Linux Enterprise Server as part of the tightvnc package. For Windows, TightVNC is also available.

X Server

Find a suitable X server implementation on any Linux or Unix workstation. There are many commercial X Window System environments for Windows and macOS*. Some can be downloaded as free trial versions.

Tip
Tip: Additional Information

Before installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on IBM Z, consult the README file located in the root directory of the first installation medium of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. This file complements this documentation.

5.2.2 Installation Types

This section gives an overview of the different types of installation possible with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server can be installed in an LPAR, as a guest within z/VM, or as a guest within KVM.

Depending on the mode of installation (LPAR or z/VM), there are different possibilities for starting the installation process and IPLing the installed system.

5.2.2.1 LPAR

If you install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z into a logical partition (LPAR), assign memory and processors to the instance. Installing into LPAR is recommended for highly loaded production machines. Running in LPAR also makes higher security standards available. Networking between LPARs is possible over external interfaces or HiperSockets. In case you plan to use your installation for virtualization with KVM, installing into LPAR is highly recommended.

5.2.2.2 z/VM

Running SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z in z/VM means that SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is a guest system within z/VM. An advantage of this mode is that you have full control over SUSE Linux Enterprise Server from z/VM. This is very helpful for kernel development or kernel-based debugging. It is also very easy to add or remove hardware to and from Linux guests. Creating additional SUSE Linux Enterprise Server guests is simple and you can run hundreds of Linux instances simultaneously.

5.2.2.3 KVM Guest

Being able to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z as a KVM guest requires a KVM host server instance installed into LPAR. For details on the guest installation, refer to Procedure 5.3, “Overview of a KVM Guest Installation”.

5.2.3 IPL Options

This section provides the information needed to do an IPL for the first installation. Depending on the type of installation, different options need to be used. The VM reader, load from CD-ROM or server and load from an SCSI-attached DVD-ROM options are discussed. Installing the software packages, which is done over the network, does not require the IPL medium.

5.2.3.1 VM Reader

To IPL from a VM reader, transfer the necessary files into the reader first. For convenience of administration, it is recommended to create a user linuxmnt that owns a minidisk with the files and scripts needed for IPL. This minidisk is then accessed read-only by the Linux guests. For details, see Section 5.3.4.2.1, “IPL from the z/VM Reader”.

5.2.3.2 Load from Removable Media or Server

For IPLing into an LPAR, load the kernel image directly from the SE's or the HMC's CD/DVD-ROM device or from any remote system accessible through FTP. This function can be performed from the HMC. The installation process requires a file with a mapping of the location of the installation data in the file system and the memory locations to which to copy the data.

For SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, there are two such files. Both are located in the root directory of the first installation medium:

  • suse.ins, for which to work you need to set up network access in Linuxrc before starting the installation.

  • susehmc.ins which allows installing without network access.

In the left navigation pane of the HMC expand Systems Management › Systems and select the mainframe system you want to work with. Choose the LPAR where you want to boot SUSE Linux Enterprise Server from the table of LPARs and select Load from Removable Media or Server.

Now either choose Hardware Management Console CD-ROM/DVD or FTP Source. If having chosen the latter option, provide the servers address or name and your credentials. If the appropriate .ins file is not located in the root directory of the server, provide the path to this file. Continue to the Select the software to load menu and select the appropriate .ins entry. Start the installation with OK.

5.2.3.3 Load from SCSI-Attached DVD

To IPL from an SCSI DVD, you need access to an FCP adapter connected to a DVD drive. You need the values for WWPN and LUN from the SCSI drive. For details, see Section 5.3.4.1.2, “IPL from FCP-Attached SCSI DVD”.

5.2.3.4 Load from the Network with zPXE

IPLing from the Network with zPXE requires a Cobbler server providing the kernel, RAM disk and a parmfile. It is initiated by running the ZPXE EXEC script. See Section 5.3.1.3, “Using a Cobbler Server for zPXE” for details. zPXE is only available on z/VM.

5.3 Preparing for Installation

This chapter explains how to make the data accessible for installation, install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server using different methods, and prepare and use the IPL of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system. The chapter also provides information about network configuration and network installation.

5.3.1 Making the Installation Data Available

This section provides detailed information about making the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server IBM Z installation data accessible for installation. Depending on your computer and system environment, choose between NFS or FTP installation. If you are running Microsoft Windows workstations in your environment, you can use the Windows network (including the SMB protocol) to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on your IBM Z system.

Tip
Tip: IPL from DVD

It is possible to IPL from DVD and use the DVD as the installation medium. This is very convenient if you have restrictions setting up an installation server providing installation media over your network. The prerequisite is an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Drive.

Note
Note: No Installation from Hard Disk

It is not possible to perform installation from a hard disk by putting the content of the DVD to a partition on a DASD.

5.3.1.1 Using a Linux Workstation or SUSE Linux Enterprise Server DVD

You can use a Linux workstation in your computer environment to provide the installation data to the IBM Z installation process by NFS or FTP. If the Linux workstation runs SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, you can set up an installation server (NFS or FTP) using the YaST Installation Server module as described in Section 16.1, “Setting Up an Installation Server Using YaST”.

Important
Important: Exporting Mounted Devices with NFS

Exporting the file system root (/) does not automatically export the mounted devices, such as DVD. Therefore, you need to explicitly name the mount point in /etc/exports:

/media/dvd  *(ro)

After changing this file, restart the NFS server with the command sudo systemctl restart nfsserver.

Setting up an FTP server on a Linux system involves the installation and configuration of server software like vsftpd. If you are using SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, refer to Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 38 “Setting Up an FTP Server with YaST” for installation instructions. Downloading the installation data via anonymous login is not supported, therefore you need to configure the FTP server to support user authentication.

5.3.1.1.1 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on DVD

The first installation medium of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z contains a bootable Linux image for Intel-based workstations and an image for IBM Z.

For Intel-based workstations, boot from this medium. When prompted, choose the desired answer language and keyboard layout and select Start rescue system. You need at least 64 MB RAM for this. No disk space is needed, because the entire rescue system resides in the workstation's RAM. This approach requires setting up the networking of the workstation manually.

For IBM Z, IPL your LPAR/VM guest from this medium as described in Section 5.3.4.1.2, “IPL from FCP-Attached SCSI DVD”. After entering your network parameters, the installation system treats the medium as the source of installation data. Because IBM Z cannot have an X11-capable terminal attached directly, choose between VNC or SSH installation. Refer to Section 11.3, “Monitoring Installation via VNC” or Section 11.4, “Monitoring Installation via SSH” for more information. SSH also provides a graphical installation by tunneling the X connection through SSH with ssh -X.

5.3.1.2 Using a Microsoft Windows Workstation

You can use a Microsoft Windows workstation on your network to make the installation media available. The easiest way to do this is to use the SMB protocol. Make sure to activate SMB over TCP/IP as this enables the encapsulation of SMB packages into TCP/IP packages. Find details in the Windows online help or other Windows-related documentation that covers networking.

5.3.1.2.1 Using SMB

To make the installation media available with SMB, insert the USB flash drive with SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso into the USB port of the Windows workstation. Then create a new share using the USB flash drive's letter and make it available for everyone in the network.

The installation path in YaST can be:

smb://DOMAIN;USER:PW@SERVERNAME/SHAREPATH

Where the placeholders mean:

DOMAIN

Optional workgroup or active directory domain.

USER , PW

Optional user name and password of a user who can access this server and its share.

SERVERNAME

The name of the server that hosts the share(s).

SHAREPATH

The path to the share(s).

5.3.1.2.2 With NFS

Refer to the documentation provided with the third party product that enables NFS server services for your Windows workstation. The USB flash drive containing the SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso medium must be in the available NFS path.

5.3.1.2.3 Using FTP

Refer to the documentation provided with the third-party product that is enabling FTP server services on your Windows workstation. The USB flash drive containing the SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso medium must be in the available FTP path.

The FTP server that is bundled with certain Microsoft Windows releases implements only a subset of the FTP commands, and it is not suitable for providing the installation data. In this case, use a third-party FTP server that offers the required functionality.

5.3.1.2.4 Using an FCP-Attached SCSI DVD Drive

After you IPLed from the SCSI DVD as described in Section 5.3.4.1.2, “IPL from FCP-Attached SCSI DVD”, the installation system uses the DVD as the installation medium. In this case, you do not need the installation media on an FTP, NFS, or SMB server. However, you need the network configuration data for your SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, because you must set up the network during the installation to perform a graphical installation via VNC or by X.

5.3.1.3 Using a Cobbler Server for zPXE

IPLing from the network requires a Cobbler server to provide the kernel, initrd, and the installation data. Preparing the Cobbler server requires the following steps:

5.3.1.3.1 Importing the Installation Data

Importing the media requires the installation source to be available on the Cobbler server—either from USB flash drive or from a network source. Run the following command to import the data:

> sudo cobbler import --path=PATH1 --name=IDENTIFIER2 --arch=s390x

1

Mount point of the installation data.

2

A string identifying the imported product, for example sles15_s390x. This string is used as the name for the subdirectory where the installation data is copied to. On a Cobbler server running on SUSE Linux Enterprise this is /srv/www/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER. This path may be different if Cobbler runs on another operating system.

5.3.1.3.2 Adding a Distribution

Adding a distribution allows Cobbler to provide the kernel and the initrd required to IPL via zPXE. Run the following command on the Cobbler server to add SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z:

> sudo cobbler distro add --arch=s390 --breed=suse --name="IDENTIFIER"1 \
  --os-version=sles152 \
  --initrd=/srv/www/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER/boot/s390x/initrd3 \
  --kernel=/srv/www/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER/boot/s390x/linux4 \
  --kopts="install=http://cobbler.example.com/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER"5

1

Unique identifier for the distribution, for example SLES 15 SP2 IBM Z.

2

Operating system identifier. Use sles15.

3

Path to the initrd. The first part of the path (/srv/www/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER/) depends on the location of the imported data and the subdirectory name you chose when importing the installation data.

4

Path to the kernel. The first part of the path (/srv/www/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER/) depends on the location of the imported data and the subdirectory name you chose when importing the installation data.

5

URL to the installation directory on the Cobbler server.

5.3.1.3.3 Adjusting the Profile

Adding a distribution (see Section 5.3.1.3.2, “Adding a Distribution”) automatically generates a profile with the corresponding IDENTIFIER. Use the following command to make a few required adjustments:

> sudo cobbler distro edit \
--name=IDENTIFIER1 --os-version=sles102 --ksmeta=""3
--kopts="install=http://cobbler.example.com/cobbler/ks_mirror/IDENTIFIER"4

1

Identifier for the profile. Use the string specified when added the distribution.

2

Operating system version. Distribution to which the profile should apply. Use the string specified with --name=IDENTIFIER in the importing step.

3

Option required for templating Kickstart files. Since it is not used for SUSE, leave it empty.

4

Space-separated list of kernel parameters. It must include at least the install parameter.

5.3.1.3.4 Adding Systems

The last step is to add systems to the Cobbler server. This step must be performed for every IBM Z guest that should boot via zPXE. Guests are identified by their z/VM user ID (in the following example, the ID linux01). Note that the ID must be lowercase. To add a system, run the following command:

> sudo cobbler system add --name=linux01 --hostname=linux01.example.com \
--profile=IDENTIFIER --interface=qdio \
--ip-address=192.168.2.103 --subnet=192.168.2.255 --netmask=255.255.255.0 \
--name-servers=192.168.1.116 --name-servers-search=example.com \
--gateway=192.168.2.1 --kopts="KERNEL_OPTIONS"

The --kopts option allows you to specify the kernel and installation parameters that are usually specified in the parmfile. Specify the parameters using the following format: PARAMETER1=VALUE1 PARAMETER2=VALUE2. The installer prompts for missing parameters. For a fully-automated installation, you need to specify all parameters for networking, DASDs and provide an AutoYaST file. Below is an example for a guest equipped with an OSA interface using the same network parameters as above.

--kopts=" \
AutoYaST=http://192.168.0.5/autoinst.xml \
Hostname=linux01.example.com \
Domain=example.com \
HostIP=192.168.2.103 \
Gateway=192.168.2.1 \
Nameserver=192.168.1.116 \
Searchdns=example.com \
InstNetDev=osa; \
Netmask=255.255.255.0 \
Broadcast=192.168.2.255 \
OsaInterface=qdio \
Layer2=0 \
PortNo=0 \
ReadChannel=0.0.0700 \
WriteChannel=0.0.0701 \
DataChannel=0.0.0702 \
DASD=600"

5.3.1.4 Installing from a USB Flash Drive of the HMC

Installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on IBM Z servers usually requires a network installation source. If this requirement cannot be fulfilled, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server allows you to use the USB flash drive of the Hardware Management Console (HMC) as an installation source for installation on an LPAR.

To perform installation from the USB flash drive of the HMC, proceed as follows:

Important
Important: Configure Network

Before starting the installation, specify a network configuration in linuxrc. You cannot do this via boot parameters, and it is very likely that you will need network access. In linuxrc, go to Start Installation, then choose Network Setup.

Important
Important: Linux System Must Boot First

Before granting access to the media in the USB flash drive of the HMC, wait until the Linux system is booted. IPLing can disrupt the connection between the HMC and the LPAR. If the first attempt to use the described method fails, you can grant the access and retry the option HMC.

Note
Note: Installation Repository

The USB flash drive is not kept as an installation repository, as the installation is a one-time procedure. If you need an installation repository, register and use the online repository.

5.3.2 Installation Types

This section describes SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation steps for each installation mode. When the preparation steps described in the previous chapters have been completed, follow the overview of the desired installation mode.

As described in Section 5.3.1, “Making the Installation Data Available”, there are three different installation modes for Linux on IBM Z: LPAR, z/VM, and KVM guest installation.

Procedure 5.1: Overview of an LPAR Installation
  1. Prepare the devices needed for installation. See Section 5.3.3.1, “Preparing the IPL of an LPAR Installation”.

  2. IPL the installation system. See Section 5.3.4.1, “IPLing an LPAR Installation”.

  3. Configure the network. See Section 5.3.5, “Network Configuration”.

  4. Connect to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system. See Section 5.3.6, “Connecting to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System”.

  5. Start the installation using YaST and IPL the installed system. See Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

Procedure 5.2: Installation Overview of z/VM Installation
  1. Prepare the devices needed for installation. See Section 5.3.3.2.1, “Adding a Linux Guest Using DirMaint”.

  2. IPL the installation system. See Section 5.3.4.2, “IPLing a z/VM Installation”.

  3. Configure the network. See Section 5.3.5, “Network Configuration”.

  4. Connect to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system. See Section 5.3.6, “Connecting to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System”.

  5. Start the installation using YaST and IPL the installed system. See Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

Procedure 5.3: Overview of a KVM Guest Installation
  1. Create a virtual disk image and write a domain XML file. See Section 5.3.3.3, “Preparing the IPL of a KVM Guest Installation”.

  2. Prepare the installation target and IPL the VM Guest. See Section 5.3.4.3, “IPLing a KVM Guest Installation”.

  3. Section 5.3.5.3, “Set Up the Network and Select the Installation Source”.

  4. Connect to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system. See Section 5.3.6, “Connecting to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System”.

  5. Start the installation using YaST and IPL the installed system. See Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

5.3.3 Preparing the IPL of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System

5.3.3.1 Preparing the IPL of an LPAR Installation

Configure your IBM Z system to start in ESA/S390 or Linux-only mode with an appropriate activation profile and IOCDS. For further information, refer to the IBM documentation. Continue as described in Section 5.3.4.1, “IPLing an LPAR Installation”.

5.3.3.2 Preparing the IPL of a z/VM Installation

5.3.3.2.1 Adding a Linux Guest Using DirMaint

The first step is to attach and format one or multiple DASDs in the system to be used by the Linux guest in z/VM. Next, create a new user in z/VM. The example shows the directory for a user LINUX1 with the password LINPWD, 1 GB of memory (extendable up to 2 GB), several minidisks (MDISK), two CPUs, and an OSA QDIO device.

Tip
Tip: Assigning Memory to z/VM guests

When assigning memory to a z/VM guest, make sure that the memory size is adequate for the preferred installation type. See Section 5.2.1.1.1, “Memory Requirements”. To set the memory size to 1 GB, use the command CP DEFINE STORAGE 1G. After the installation has finished, reset the memory size to the desired value.

Example 5.1: Configuration of a z/VM Directory
USER LINUX1 LINPWD 1024M 2048M G
*____________________________________________
* LINUX1
*____________________________________________
* This VM Linux guest has two CPUs defined.

CPU 01 CPUID 111111
CPU 02 CPUID 111222
IPL CMS PARM AUTOCR
IUCV ANY
IUCV ALLOW
MACH ESA 10
OPTION MAINTCCW RMCHINFO
SHARE RELATIVE 2000
CONSOLE 01C0 3270 A
SPOOL 000C 2540 READER *
SPOOL 000D 2540 PUNCH A
SPOOL 000E 3203 A
* OSA QDIO DEVICE DEFINITIONS
DEDICATE 9A0 9A0
DEDICATE 9A1 9A1
DEDICATE 9A2 9A2
*
LINK MAINT 0190 0190 RR
LINK MAINT 019E 019E RR
LINK MAINT 019D 019D RR
* MINIDISK DEFINITIONS
MDISK 201 3390 0001 0050 DASD40 MR ONE4ME TWO4ME THR4ME
MDISK 150 3390 0052 0200 DASD40 MR ONE4ME TWO4ME THR4ME
MDISK 151 3390 0253 2800 DASD40 MR ONE4ME TWO4ME THR4ME

This example uses minidisk 201 as the guest's home disk. Minidisk 150 with 200 cylinders is the Linux swap device. Disk 151 with 2800 cylinders holds the Linux installation.

As user MAINT, add the guest to the user directory with DIRM FOR LINUX1 ADD. Enter the name of the guest (LINUX1) and press F5. Set up the environment of the user with:

DIRM DIRECT
DIRM USER WITHPASS

The last command returns a reader file number. This number is needed for the next command:

RECEIVE <number> USER DIRECT A (REPL)

You can now log in on the guest as user LINUX1.

If you do not have the dirmaint option available, refer to the IBM documentation on how to set up this user.

Proceed with Section 5.3.4.2, “IPLing a z/VM Installation”.

5.3.3.3 Preparing the IPL of a KVM Guest Installation

A KVM guest installation requires a domain XML file that specifies the virtual machine and at least one virtual disk image for the installation.

5.3.3.3.1 Create a Virtual Disk Image

By default, libvirt searches for disk images in /var/lib/libvirt/images/ on the VM Host Server. Although images can also be stored anywhere on the file system, it is recommended to store all images in a single location for easier maintainability. To create an image, log in to the KVM host server and run the following command:

qemu-img create -f qcow2 /var/lib/libvirt/images/s12lin_qcow2.img 10G

This creates a qcow2 image with a size of 10 GB in /var/lib/libvirt/images/. For more information, refer to Book “Virtualization Guide”, Chapter 31 “Guest Installation”, Section 31.2 “Managing Disk Images with qemu-img.

5.3.3.3.2 Write a Domain XML File

A domain XML file is used to define the VM Guest. To create the domain XML file, open an empty file s15-1.xml with an editor and create a file like in the following example.

Example 5.2: Example Domain XML File

The following example creates a VM Guest with a single CPU, 1 GB RAM, and the virtual disk image created in the previous section (Section 5.3.3.3.1, “Create a Virtual Disk Image”). It assumes that the virtual server is attached to the host network interface bond0. Change the source devices element to match your network setup.

<domain type="kvm">
 <name>s15-1</name>
 <description>Guest-System SUSE SLES15</description>
 <memory>1048576</memory>
 <vcpu>1</vcpu>
 <os>
  <type arch="s390x" machine="s390-ccw-virtio">hvm</type>
  <!-- Boot kernel - remove 3 lines after successfull installation -->
  <kernel>/var/lib/libvirt/images/s15-kernel.boot</kernel>
  <initrd>/var/lib/libvirt/images/s15-initrd.boot</initrd>
  <cmdline>linuxrcstderr=/dev/console</cmdline>
 </os>
 <iothreads>1</iothreads>
 <on_poweroff>destroy</on_poweroff>
 <on_reboot>restart</on_reboot>
 <on_crash>preserve</on_crash>
 <devices>
  <emulator>/usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x</emulator>
  <disk type="file" device="disk">
   <driver name="qemu" type="qcow2" cache="none" iothread="1" io="native"/>
   <source file="/var/lib/libvirt/images/s15lin_qcow2.img"/>
   <target dev="vda" bus="virtio"/>
  </disk>
  <interface type="direct">
   <source dev="bond0" mode="bridge"/>
   <model type="virtio"/>
  </interface>
  <console type="pty">
   <target type="sclp"/>
  </console>
 </devices>
</domain>

5.3.4 IPLing the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System

5.3.4.1 IPLing an LPAR Installation

There are different ways to IPL SUSE Linux Enterprise Server into an LPAR. The preferred way is to use the Load from CD-ROM or server feature of the SE or HMC.

5.3.4.1.1 IPL from DVD-ROM

Mark the LPAR to install and select Load from CD-ROM or server. Leave the field for the file location blank or enter the path to the root directory of the first DVD-ROM and select Continue. Keep the default selection in the list of options that appears. Operating system messages should now show the kernel boot messages.

5.3.4.1.2 IPL from FCP-Attached SCSI DVD

You can use the Load procedure by selecting SCSI as Load type to IPL from SCSI. Enter the WWPN (Worldwide port name) and LUN (Logical unit number) provided by your SCSI bridge or storage (16 digits—do not omit the trailing 0s). The boot program selector must be 2. Use your FCP adapter as Load address and perform an IPL.

5.3.4.2 IPLing a z/VM Installation

This section describes IPLing the installation system to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z on a z/VM system.

5.3.4.2.1 IPL from the z/VM Reader

You need a working TCP/IP connection and an FTP client program within your newly-defined z/VM guest to transfer the installation system via FTP. Setting up TCP/IP for z/VM is beyond the scope of this manual. Refer to the appropriate IBM documentation.

Log in as the z/VM Linux guest to IPL. Make the content of the directory /boot/s390x of the Unified Installer (medium 1) available via FTP within your network. From this directory, get the files linux, initrd, parmfile, and sles.exec. Transfer the files with a fixed block size of 80 characters. Specify it with the FTP command locsite fix 80. It is important to copy linux (the Linux kernel) and initrd (the installation image) as binary files, so use the binary transfer mode. parmfile and sles.exec need to be transferred in ASCII mode.

The following example shows the required steps. This particular scenario assumes that the required files are accessible from an FTP server at the IP address 192.168.0.3 and the login is lininst.

Example 5.3: Transferring the Binaries via FTP
FTP 192.168.0.3
VM TCP/IP FTP Level 530
Connecting to 192.168.0.3, port 21
220 ftpserver FTP server (Version wu-2.4.2-academ[BETA-18](1)
Thu Feb 11 16:09:02 GMT 2010) ready.
USER
lininst
331 Password required for lininst
PASS
******
230 User lininst logged in.
Command:
binary
200 Type set to I
Command:
locsite fix 80
Command:
get /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/linux sles.linux
200 PORT Command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/linux
(10664192 bytes)
226 Transfer complete.
10664192 bytes transferred in 13.91 seconds.
Transfer rate 766.70 Kbytes/sec.
Command:
get /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/initrd sles.initrd
200 PORT Command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/initrd
(21403276 bytes)
226 Transfer complete.
21403276 bytes transferred in 27.916 seconds.
Transfer rate 766.70 Kbytes/sec.
Command:
ascii
200 Type set to A
Command:
get /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/parmfile sles.parmfile
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/parmfile
(5 bytes)
226 Transfer complete.
5 bytes transferred in 0.092 seconds.
Transfer rate 0.05 Kbytes/sec.
Command:
get /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/sles.exec sles.exec
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for /media/dvd1/boot/s390x/sles.exec
(891 bytes)
226 Transfer complete.
891 bytes transferred in 0.097 seconds.
Transfer rate 0.89 Kbytes/sec.
Command:
quit

Use the REXX script sles.exec you downloaded to IPL the Linux installation system. This script loads the kernel, parmfile, and the initial RAM disk into the reader for IPL.

Example 5.4: sles.exec
/* REXX LOAD EXEC FOR SUSE LINUX S/390 VM GUESTS       */
/* LOADS SUSE LINUX S/390 FILES INTO READER            */
SAY ''
SAY 'LOADING SLES FILES INTO READER...'
'CP CLOSE RDR'
'PURGE RDR ALL'
'SPOOL PUNCH * RDR'
'PUNCH SLES LINUX A (NOH'
'PUNCH SLES PARMFILE A (NOH'
'PUNCH SLES INITRD A (NOH'
'IPL 00C'

Using the script, you can IPL the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system with the command sles. The Linux kernel then starts and outputs its boot messages.

To continue the installation, proceed to Section 5.3.5, “Network Configuration”.

5.3.4.2.2 IPL from FCP-Attached SCSI DVD

To IPL in z/VM, prepare the SCSI IPL process by using the SET LOADDEV parameter:

SET LOADDEV PORTNAME 200400E8 00D74E00 LUN 00020000 00000000 BOOT 2

After setting the LOADDEV parameter with the appropriate values, IPL your FCP adapter, for example:

IPL FC00

To continue the installation, proceed with Section 5.3.5, “Network Configuration”.

5.3.4.2.3 IPL from a Cobbler Server with zPXE

To IPL from a Cobbler server with zPXE, you need to transfer the zpxe.rexx script via FTP from the Cobbler server to your z/VM guest. To do this, the z/VM guest needs a working TCP/IP connection and an FTP client program.

Log in as the z/VM Linux guest to IPL and transfer the script with a fixed size of 80 characters in ASCII mode (see Example 5.3, “Transferring the Binaries via FTP” for an example). The zpxe.rexx script is available on the Unified Installer DVD at /boot/s390x/zpxe.rexx or on a SLE Cobbler server at /usr/share/doc/packages/s390-tools/zpxe.rexx.

zpxe.rexx is supposed to replace the PROFILE EXEC of your guest. Make a backup copy of the existing PROFILE EXEC and rename ZPXE REXX to PROFILE EXEC. Alternatively, call ZPXE REXX from the existing PROFILE EXEC by adding the 'ZPXE REXX' line to it.

The last step is to create a configuration file, ZPXE CONF that instructs ZPXE REXX which Cobbler server to contact and which disk to IPL. Run xedit zpxe conf a and create ZPXE CONF with the following content (replace the example data accordingly):

HOST cobbler.example.com
IPLDISK 600

This connects the Cobbler server next time you log in to the z/VM guest. If an installation is scheduled on the Cobbler server, it will be executed. To schedule the installation, run the following command on the Cobbler server:

> sudo cobbler system edit --name ID1 --netboot-enabled 12 --profile PROFILENAME3

1

z/VM user ID.

2

Enable IPLing from the network.

3

Name of an existing profile, see Section 5.3.1.3.3, “Adjusting the Profile”.

5.3.4.3 IPLing a KVM Guest Installation

To start the guest installation, you first need to start the VM Guest defined in Section 5.3.3.3.1, “Create a Virtual Disk Image”. Before you begin, ensure the kernel and initrd are available for IPL.

5.3.4.3.1 Preparing the installation source

Kernel and initrd of the installation system need to be copied to the VM Host Server to IPL the VM Guest into the installation system.

  1. Log in to the KVM host and make sure you can connect to the remote host or device serving the installation source.

  2. Copy the following two files from the installation source to /var/lib/libvirt/images/. If the data is served from a remote host, use ftp, sftp, or scp to transfer the files:

    /boot/s390x/initrd
    /boot/s390x/cd.ikr
  3. Rename the files on the KVM host:

    > sudo cd /var/lib/libvirt/images/
    > sudo mv initrd s15-initrd.boot
    > sudo mv cd.ikr s15-kernel.boot
5.3.4.3.2 IPL the VM Guest

To IPL the VM Guest, log in to the KVM host and run the following command:

> virsh  create s15-1.xml --console

The installation process starts when the VM Guest is up and running, and you should see the following message:

Domain s15-1 started
Connected to domain s15-1
Escape character is ^]
Initializing cgroup subsys cpuset
Initializing cgroup subsys cpu
Initializing
cgroup subsys cpuacct
.
.
Please make sure your installation medium is available.
Retry?
0) <-- Back <--
1) Yes
2) No

Answer 2) No and choose Installation on the next step. Proceed as described in Section 5.3.5.3, “Set Up the Network and Select the Installation Source”.

5.3.5 Network Configuration

Wait until the kernel has completed its start-up routines. If you perform the installation in basic mode or in an LPAR, open the Operating System Messages on the HMC or SE.

First, choose Start Installation in the linuxrc main menu. Then choose Start Installation or Update to start the installation process. Select Network as the installation medium, then select the type of network protocol to use for the installation. Section 5.3.1, “Making the Installation Data Available” describes how to make the installation data available for the various types of network connections. Currently, FTP, HTTP, NFS, and SMB/CIFS (Windows file sharing) are supported.

From the list of available devices, choose an OSA or HiperSockets network device for receiving the installation data. Although the list may contain CTC, ESCON, or IUCV devices, they are no longer supported on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

5.3.5.1 Configure a HiperSockets Interface

Select a HiperSocket device from the list of network devices. Then enter values for the read, write, and data channels:

Example 5.5: Supported Network Connection Types and Driver Parameters
Choose the network device.

 1) IBM parallel CTC Adapter (0.0.0600)
 2) IBM parallel CTC Adapter (0.0.0601)
 3) IBM parallel CTC Adapter (0.0.0602)
 4) IBM Hipersocket (0.0.0800)
 5) IBM Hipersocket (0.0.0801)
 6) IBM Hipersocket (0.0.0802)
 7) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.0700)
 8) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.0701)
 9) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.0702)
10) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.f400)
11) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.f401)
12) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.f402)
13) IBM IUCV

> 4

Device address for read channel. (Enter '+++' to abort).
[0.0.0800]> 0.0.0800

Device address for write channel. (Enter '+++' to abort).
[0.0.0801]> 0.0.0801

Device address for data channel. (Enter '+++' to abort).
[0.0.0802]> 0.0.0802

5.3.5.2 Configure an OSA Express Device

Select an OSA Express device from the list of network devices and specify a port number. Enter the values for the read, write and data channels. Choose whether to enable OSI Layer 2 support.

The port number is required for the new 2 port OSA Express 3 Network devices. If you are not using an OSA Express 3 device, enter 0. OSA Express cards can also run in the OSI layer 2 support mode or the older more common layer 3 mode. The card mode affects all systems that share the device, including systems on other LPARs. If in doubt, specify 2 for compatibility with the default mode used by other operating systems such as z/VM and z/OS. Consult with your hardware administrator for further information on these options.

Example 5.6: Network Device Driver Parameters
Choose the network device.

 1) IBM parallel CTC Adapter (0.0.0600)
 2) IBM parallel CTC Adapter (0.0.0601)
 3) IBM parallel CTC Adapter (0.0.0602)
 4) IBM Hipersocket (0.0.0800)
 5) IBM Hipersocket (0.0.0801)
 6) IBM Hipersocket (0.0.0802)
 7) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.0700)
 8) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.0701)
 9) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.0702)
10) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.f400)
11) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.f401)
12) IBM OSA Express Network card (0.0.f402)
13) IBM IUCV

> 7

Enter the relative port number. (Enter '+++' to abort).
> 0

Device address for read channel. (Enter '+++' to abort).
[0.0.0700]> 0.0.0700

Device address for write channel. (Enter '+++' to abort).
[0.0.0701]> 0.0.0701

Device address for data channel. (Enter '+++' to abort).
[0.0.0702]> 0.0.0702

Enable OSI Layer 2 support?

0) <-- Back <--
1) Yes
2) No

> 1

MAC address. (Enter '+++' to abort).
> +++

5.3.5.3 Set Up the Network and Select the Installation Source

After all network device parameters have been entered, the respective driver is installed and you see the corresponding kernel messages.

Next, you need to specify whether to use DHCP autoconfiguration for setting up the network interface parameters. Because DHCP only works on a few devices and requires special hardware configuration settings, choose NO. Doing this prompts you to specify the following networking parameters:

  • The IP address of the system to install

  • The corresponding netmask (if not having been specified with the IP address)

  • The IP address of a gateway to reach the server

  • A list of search domains covered by the domain name server (DNS)

  • The IP address of your domain name server

Example 5.7: Networking Parameters
Automatic configuration via DHCP?

0) <-- Back <--
1) Yes
2) No

> 2

Enter your IP address with network prefix.

You can enter more than one, separated by space, if necessary.
Leave empty for autoconfig.

Examples: 192.168.5.77/24 2001:db8:75:fff::3/64. (Enter '+++' to abort).
> 192.168.0.20/24

Enter your name server IP address.

You can enter more than one, separated by space, if necessary.
Leave empty if you don't need one.

Examples: 192.168.5.77 2001:db8:75:fff::3. (Enter '+++' to abort).
> 192.168.0.1

Enter your search domains, separated by a space:. (Enter '+++' to abort).
> example.com

Enter the IP address of your name server. Leave empty if you do not need one. (En
ter '+++' to abort).
> 192.168.0.1

Finally, provide the required information about the installation server, such as the IP address, the directory containing the installation data, and login credentials. The installation system loads when the required information has been provided.

5.3.6 Connecting to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System

After loading the installation system, linuxrc prompts you to choose what type of display to use to control the installation procedure. The available options include X11 (X Window System), VNC (Virtual Network Computing protocol), SSH (text mode or X11 installation via Secure Shell), or ASCII Console. The recommended options are VNC or SSH.

If the ASCII Console option is selected, YaST starts in text mode, and you can perform the installation directly within your terminal. See Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 4 “YaST in Text Mode” for instructions on how to use YaST in the text mode. Using the ASCII Console is only useful when installing into LPAR.

Note
Note: Terminal Emulation for ASCII Console

To be able to work with YaST in the text mode, it needs to run in a terminal with VT220/Linux emulation (also called ASCII console).

5.3.6.1 Initiating the Installation for VNC

To remotely control an installation via VNC, follow these steps:

  1. Selecting the VNC option starts the VNC server. A short note in the console displays the IP address and display number for connecting with vncviewer.

  2. Enter the IP address and the display number of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system when prompted to do so.

  3. When prompted, enter the IP address and the display number of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system.

    http://<IP address of installation system>:5801/
  4. After the connection has been established, install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server with YaST.

5.3.6.2 Initiating the Installation for the X Window System

Important
Important: X Authentication Mechanism

The direct installation with the X Window System relies on an authentication mechanism based on host names. This mechanism is disabled in current SUSE Linux Enterprise Server versions. We recommend performing the installation using SSH or VNC.

To remotely control an installation via X forwarding, follow these steps:

  1. Make sure that the X server allows the client (the system that is installed) to connect. Set the variable DISPLAYMANAGER_XSERVER_TCP_PORT_6000_OPEN="yes" in the file /etc/sysconfig/displaymanager. Restart the X server and allow client binding to the server using xhost CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS.

  2. When prompted at the installation system, enter the IP address of the machine running the X server.

  3. Wait until YaST opens, then start the installation.

5.3.6.3 Initiating the Installation for SSH

To connect to an installation system with the name earth via SSH, use the ssh -X earth command. If your workstation runs on Microsoft Windows, use the Putty tool available from http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/. Set Enable X11 forwarding in Putty under Connection › SSH › X11.

If you use another operating system, execute ssh -X earth to connect to an installation system with the name earth. X-Forwarding over SSH is supported if you have a local X server available. Otherwise, YaST provides a text interface over ncurses.

When prompted, enter the root user name and log in with your password. Enter yast.ssh to start YaST. YaST then guides you through the installation.

Important
Important: Fixing YaST over SSH Issue

In certain situations, running the GUI version of YaST over SSH with X forwarding may fail with the following error message:

XIO: fatal IO error 11 (Resource temporarily unavailable) on X server "localhost:11.0"

In this case you have two options.

  • Run YaST with the QT_XCB_GL_INTEGRATION=none option, for example:

    QT_XCB_GL_INTEGRATION=none yast.ssh
    QT_XCB_GL_INTEGRATION=none yast2 disk
  • Run the ncurses version of YaST application by disabling X forwarding or by specifying ncurses as the desired UI. To do the latter, use the yast2 disk --ncurses or YUI_PREFERED_BACKEND=ncurses yast2 disk command.

Proceed with the installation procedure as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

5.3.7 The SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Boot Procedure on IBM Z

On SLES 10 and 11 the boot process was handled by the zipl boot loader. To enable booting from Btrfs partitions and supporting system rollbacks with Snapper, the way SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is booted on IBM Z has changed.

GRUB 2 replaces zipl on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server for IBM Z. GRUB 2 on the AMD64/Intel 64 architecture includes device drivers on the firmware level to access the file system. On the mainframe there is no firmware and adding ccw to GRUB 2 would not only be a major undertaking, but would also require a reimplementation of zipl in GRUB 2. Therefore SUSE Linux Enterprise Server uses a two-stage approach:

Stage One:

A separate partition containing the kernel and an initrd is mounted to /boot/zipl. This kernel and the initrd are loaded via zipl using the configuration from /boot/zipl/config.

This configuration adds the keyword initgrub to the kernel command line. When the kernel and initrd are loaded, the initrd activates the devices required to mount the root file system (see /boot/zipl/active_devices.txt). Afterward a GRUB 2 user space program is started, which reads /boot/grub2/grub.cfg.

Stage Two:

The kernel and the initrd specified in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg are started via kexec. Devices listed in /boot/zipl/active_devices.txt that are necessary for starting the on-disk system are then activated. Other devices from that list will be whitelisted, but otherwise ignored. The root file system is mounted and the boot procedure continues like on the other architectures.

For more details on the boot process, refer to Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 12 “Introduction to the Boot Process”.

5.4 Secure boot

For the secure boot functionality to work on a IBM Z system, the following conditions must be met.

  • The machine must be z15 T01, z15 T02, LinuxONE III LT1, LinuxONE III LT2, or a later model.

  • You must use an LPAR (secure boot is not supported on z/VM and KVM).

  • The LPAR must have secure boot enabled.

  • You must use SCSI (FCP) disks (secure boot is not supported on DASD).

Note
Note: Hardware migration

In case you migrate to a different machine (for example, from z13 to z15), ensure that the LPAR on the target machine has the secure boot state of the system on its disk.

Changing the secure boot state must be performed according to the following procedure.

Procedure 5.4: Changing secure boot state
  1. Enable secure boot in YaST and write the new bootloader.

  2. Shut down the system.

  3. Change the configuration of the LPAR (enable or disable secure boot).

  4. Boot the system.

Note
Note: Secure boot on HMC

The system on the disk configured with the secure=1 parameter can be booted on z15 HMC as long as the firmware supports the new on-disk format (which is always the case on z15).

5.5 The Parmfile—Automating the System Configuration

The installation process can be partially automated by specifying the essential parameters in the parmfile. The parmfile contains all the data required for network setup and DASD configuration. In addition to that, it can be used to set up the connection method to the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation system and the YaST instance running there. This reduces user interaction to the actual YaST installation.

The parameters listed in Section 5.5.1, “General Parameters” can be passed to the installation routine as the default values for installation. Note that all IP addresses, server names, and numerical values are examples. Replace them with the actual values of your installation scenario.

The number of lines in the parmfile is limited to 10. You can specify more than one parameter on a line. Parameter names are not case-sensitive. Parameters must be separated by spaces. You may specify the parameters in any order. Always keep the PARAMETER=value string together on one line. The length of each line must not exceed 80 characters. For example:

Hostname=s390zvm01.suse.de HostIP=10.11.134.65
Tip
Tip: Using IPv6 during the Installation

By default, you can only assign IPv4 network addresses to your machine. To enable IPv6 during installation, specify one of the following parameters at the boot prompt: ipv6=1 (accept IPv4 and IPv6) or ipv6only=1 (accept IPv6 only).

Some of the following parameters are required. If they are missing, the automatic process prompts you to specify them.

5.5.1 General Parameters

AutoYaST=<URL> Manual=0

The AutoYaST parameter specifies the location of the autoinst.xml control file for automatic installation. The Manual parameter controls if the other parameters are only default values that still must be acknowledged by the user. Set this parameter to 0 if all values should be accepted and no questions asked. Setting AutoYaST defaults Manual to 0.

DeviceAutoConfig=<0|1|2>

In linuxrc, the DeviceAutoConfig parameter controls the use of I/O device auto-configuration data for IBM Z systems.

If set to 0, auto-configuration is disabled. If set to 1, the existing auto-config data are applied. If set to 2 (the default), a dialog is shown if auto-config data are present. The user is asked whether to apply them.

For more details, see Section 5.5.4, “I/O device auto-configuration on IBM Z systems”.

Info=<URL>

Specifies a location for a file with additional options. This helps to overcome the limitations of 10 lines (and 80 characters per line under z/VM) for the parmfile. Further documentation on the Info file can be found in Book “AutoYaST Guide”, Chapter 6 “The Auto-Installation Process”, Section 6.3.3 “Combining the linuxrc info File with the AutoYaST Control File”. Since the Info file can typically only be accessed through the network on IBM Z, you cannot use it to specify the options required to set up the network (that is, the options described in Section 5.5.2, “Configuring the Network Interface”). Other linuxrc-specific options, such as those related to debugging, must be specified in the parmfile itself.

Upgrade=<0|1>

To upgrade SUSE Linux Enterprise, specify Upgrade=1. A custom parmfile is required for upgrading an existing installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise. Without this parameter, the installation provides no upgrade option.

5.5.2 Configuring the Network Interface

Important
Important: Configuring the Network Interface

The settings described in this section apply only to the network interface used during installation. Configure additional network interfaces in the installed system by following the instructions in Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.5 “Configuring a Network Connection Manually”.

Hostname=zsystems.example.com

Enter the fully qualified host name.

Domain=example.com

Domain search path for DNS. Allows you to use short host names instead of fully qualified ones.

HostIP=192.168.1.2/24

Enter the IP address of the interface to configure.

Gateway=192.168.1.3

Specify the gateway to use.

Nameserver=192.168.1.4

Specify the DNS server in charge.

InstNetDev=osa

Enter the type of interface to configure. Possible values are osa, hsi, ctc, escon, and iucv (CTC, ESCON, and IUCV are no longer supported).

For the ctc interfaces escon and iucv (CTC, ESCON, and IUCV are no longer supported), enter the IP address of the peer:

Pointopoint=192.168.55.20
OsaInterface=<lcs|qdio>

For osa network devices, specify the host interface (qdio or lcs).

Layer2=<0|1>

For osa QDIO Ethernet and hsi devices, specify whether to enable (1) or disable (0) OSI Layer 2 support.

OSAHWAddr=02:00:65:00:01:09

For Layer 2-enabled osa QDIO Ethernet devices. Either specify a MAC address manually or state OSAHWADDR= (with trailing white space) for the system default.

PortNo=<0|1>

For osa network devices, specify the port number (provided the device supports this feature). The default value is 0.

Each of the interfaces requires certain setup options:

  • Interfaces ctc and escon (CTC and ESCON are no longer supported):

    ReadChannel=0.0.0600
    WriteChannel=0.0.0601

    ReadChannel specifies the READ channel to use. WriteChannel specifies the WRITE channel.

  • For the ctc interface (no longer supported), specify the protocol that should be used for this interface:

    CTCProtocol=<0/1/2>

    Valid entries would be:

    0

    Compatibility mode, also for non-Linux peers other than OS/390 and z/OS (this is the default mode)

    1

    Extended mode

    2

    Compatibility mode with OS/390 and z/OS

  • Network device type osa with interface lcs:

    ReadChannel=0.0.0124

    ReadChannel stands for the channel number used in this setup. A second port number can be derived from this by adding one to ReadChannel. Portnumber is used to specify the relative port.

  • Interface iucv:

    IUCVPeer=PEER

    Enter the name of the peer machine.

  • Network device type osa with interface qdio for OSA-Express Gigabit Ethernet:

    ReadChannel=0.0.0700
    WriteChannel=0.0.0701
    DataChannel=0.0.0702

    For ReadChannel, enter the number of the READ channel. For WriteChannel, enter the number of the WRITE channel. DataChannel specifies the DATA channel. Make sure that the READ channel has an even device number.

  • Interface hsi for HiperSockets and VM guest LANs:

    ReadChannel=0.0.0800
    WriteChannel=0.0.0801
    DataChannel=0.0.0802

    For ReadChannel, enter the appropriate number for the READ channel. For WriteChannel and DataChannel, enter the WRITE and DATA channel numbers.

5.5.3 Specifying the Installation Source and YaST Interface

Install=nfs://server/directory/DVD1/

Specify the location of the installation source to use. Supported protocols are nfs, smb (Samba/CIFS), ftp, tftp http, and https.

If an ftp, tftp or smb URL is provided, specify the user name and password. Skip credentials for anonymous or guest login.

Install=ftp://USER:PASSWORD@SERVER/DIRECTORY/DVD1/
Install=tftp://USER:PASSWORD@SERVER/DIRECTORY/DVD1/

If you want to perform the installation over an encrypted connection, use an https URL. If the certificate cannot be verified, use the sslcerts=0 boot option to disable certificate checking.

In case of a Samba or CIFS installation, you can also specify the domain:

Install=smb://WORKDOMAIN;USER:PASSWORD@SERVER/DIRECTORY/DVD1/
ssh=1 vnc=1 Display_IP=192.168.42.42

The installation method depends on which parameter you specify. ssh enables SSH installation, vnc starts a VNC server on the installing machine, and Display_IP causes the installing system to try to connect to an X server at the specified address. Only one of these parameters should be set.

Important
Important: X Authentication Mechanism

The direct installation with the X Window System relies on an authentication mechanism based on host names. This mechanism is disabled on current SUSE Linux Enterprise Server versions. We recommend to perform an installation using SSH or VNC is preferred.

To allow a connection between YaST and the remote X server, run xhost <IP address> with the address of the installing machine on the remote machine.

For VNC, specify a password of six to eight characters to use for installation:

VNCPassword=<a password>

For SSH, specify a password of six to eight characters to use for installation:

ssh.password=<a password>

5.5.4 I/O device auto-configuration on IBM Z systems

I/O device auto-configuration is a mechanism that allows users to specify IDs and settings of I/O devices that should be automatically enabled in Linux. This information is specified for an LPAR via an HMC running in the DPM (Dynamic Partition Manager) mode.

Note
Note

The I/O device auto-configuration functionality is available on systems with the DPM running. DPM runs by default on LinuxONE machines. For IBM Z, this functionality must be ordered.

In linuxrc, the DeviceAutoConfig parameter controls the use of I/O device auto-configuration data for IBM Z systems.

DeviceAutoConfig=0

If set to 0, auto-configuration is disabled.

DeviceAutoConfig=1

If set to 1, existing auto-config data are applied.

DeviceAutoConfig=2 (default)

If set to 2 (the default), a dialog is shown if auto-config data are present. The user is asked whether to apply them.

If device auto-config is disabled by the user, the kernel parameter rd.zdev=no-auto is added to the boot options of the target system.

To enable I/O auto-configuration using YaST, run the yast2 system_settings command, switch to the Kernel Settings section, and enable the Enable I/O device auto-configuration option.

To disable I/O auto-configuration in an AutoYaST profile, add the following kernel parameter in the append section of the global boot loader options. For example:

<bootloader>
  <global>
    <append>rd.zdev=no-auto</append>
  </global>
</bootloader>

For more context on the AutoYaST boot loader options, see Book “AutoYaST Guide”, Chapter 4 “Configuration and Installation Options”, Section 4.4 “The Boot Loader”.

During installation, the status of the auto-configuration setting is displayed in the Device Settings section of the Installation Settings' screen.

5.5.5 Example Parmfiles

The maximum capacity of a parmfile is 860 characters. As a rule of thumb, the parmfile should contain a maximum of 10 lines with no more than 79 characters. When reading a parmfile, all lines are concatenated without adding white spaces, therefore the last character (79) of each line needs to be a Space.

To receive potential error messages on the console, use

linuxrclog=/dev/console
Example 5.8: Parmfile for an installation from NFS with VNC and AutoYaST, with I/O device auto configuration
ramdisk_size=131072 root=/dev/ram1 ro init=/linuxrc TERM=dumb
instnetdev=osa osainterface=qdio layer2=1 osahwaddr=
pointopoint=192.168.0.1 hostip=192.168.0.2
nameserver=192.168.0.3 DeviceAutoConfig=1
install=nfs://192.168.0.4/SLES/SLES-12-Server/s390x/DVD1
autoyast=http://192.168.0.5/autoinst.xml
linuxrclog=/dev/console vnc=1 VNCPassword=testing
Example 5.9: Parmfile for Installation with NFS, SSH, and HSI and AutoYaST with NFS
ramdisk_size=131072 root=/dev/ram1 ro init=/linuxrc TERM=dumb
AutoYast=nfs://192.168.1.1/autoinst/s390.xml
Hostname=zsystems.example.com HostIP=192.168.1.2
Gateway=192.168.1.3 Nameserver=192.168.1.4
InstNetDev=hsi layer2=0
Netmask=255.255.255.128 Broadcast=192.168.1.255
readchannel=0.0.702c writechannel=0.0.702d datachannel=0.0.702e
install=nfs://192.168.1.5/SLES-12-Server/s390x/DVD1/
ssh=1 ssh.password=testing linuxrclog=/dev/console
Example 5.10: Parmfile for Installation in VLAN
ro ramdisk_size=50000 MANUAL=0 PORTNO=1 ReadChannel=0.0.b140
WriteChannel=0.0.b141 DataChannel=0.0.b142
cio_ignore=all,!condev,!0.0.b140-0.0.b142,!0.0.e92c,!0.0.5000,!0.0.5040
HostIP= Gateway= Hostname=zsystems.example.com nameserver=192.168.0.1
Install=ftp://user:password@10.0.0.1/s390x/SLES15.0/INST/ usevnc=1
vncpassword=12345 InstNetDev=osa Layer2=1 OSAInterface=qdio ssl_certs=0
osahwaddr= domain=example.com self_update=0
vlanid=201

5.6 Using the vt220 Terminal Emulator

Recent MicroCode Levels allow the use of an integrated vt220 terminal emulator (ASCII terminal) in addition to the standard line mode terminal. The vt220 terminal is connected to /dev/ttysclp0. The line mode terminal is connected to /dev/ttysclp_line0. For LPAR installations, the vt220 terminal emulator is activated by default.

To start the ASCII console on HMC, log in to the HMC, and select Systems Management › Systems › IMAGE_ID . Select the radio button for the LPAR and select Recovery › Integrated ASCII Console.

To redirect the kernel messages at boot time from the system console to the vt220 terminal, add the following entries to the parameters line in /etc/zipl.conf:

console=ttysclp0 console=ttysclp_line0

The resulting parameters line would look like the following example:

parameters = "root=/dev/dasda2 TERM=dumb console=ttysclp0 console=ttysclp_line0"

Save the changes in /etc/zipl.conf, run zipl, and reboot the system.

5.7 Further Information on IBM Z

Find further technical documentation about IBM Z in the IBM Redbooks (https://www.redbooks.ibm.com/Redbooks.nsf/domains/zsystems) or at IBM developerWorks (https://developer.ibm.com/). SUSE Linux Enterprise Server-specific documentation is available from https://developer.ibm.com/technologies/linux/.

5.7.1 General Documents about Linux on IBM Z

A general coverage of Linux on IBM Z can be found in the following documents:

  • Linux on IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: ISP and ASP Solutions (SG24-6299)

These documents might not reflect the current state of Linux, but the principles of Linux deployment outlined there remain accurate.

5.7.2 Technical Issues of Linux on IBM Z

Refer to the following documents for technical information about the Linux kernel and application topics. For the most recent versions of the documents, visit (https://developer.ibm.com/technologies/linux/).

  • Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands

  • zSeries ELF Application Binary Interface Supplement

  • Linux on System z Device Drivers, Using the Dump Tools

  • IBM zEnterprise 196 Technical Guide

  • IBM zEnterprise EC12 Technical Guide

  • IBM z13 Technical Guide

  • IBM z14 Technical Guide

  • IBM z15 Technical Guide

A Redbook for Linux application development is available at http://www.redbooks.ibm.com:

  • Linux on IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Application Development (SG24-6807)

5.7.3 Advanced Configurations for Linux on IBM Z

Refer to the following Redbooks, Redpapers, and online resources for more complex IBM Z scenarios:

6 Installation on Hardware Not Supported at Release

With some newer hardware, the installation medium of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server cannot boot. This can be the case when the hardware did not exist at the time of the release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. For such a situation SUSE provides Kernel Update ISO (kISO) images. This chapter describes how to use the Kernel Update to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on current hardware.

6.1 Download Kernel Update

Kernel Update ISO images are available on the SUSE SolidDriver home page. Use https://drivers.suse.com to search for bootable ISO images for your vendor and operating system version.

You can download the full ISO image or only the initrd and linux files. The ISO usually needs to be copied to a USB flash drive or burned to a DVD. The initrd and linux files can be used for a PXE boot. For details about booting via PXE, see Chapter 17, Preparing Network Boot Environment.

6.2 Boot Kernel Update

To use the Kernel Update, boot from the USB flash drive or via PXE. When the linux and the initrd are loaded, you will be asked to insert the installation medium.

You can use the boot parameters described in Chapter 7, Boot Parameters. This allows using other installation sources than the installation USB flash drive.

Part II Installation Procedure

  • 7 Boot Parameters
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server allows setting several parameters during boot, for example choosing the source of the installation data or setting the network configuration.

  • 8 Installation Steps
  • This chapter describes the procedure in which the data for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is copied to the target device. Some basic configuration parameters for the newly installed system are set during the procedure. A graphical user interface will guide you through the installation. The procedure described in the following also applies to remote installation procedures as described in Chapter 11, Remote Installation. The text mode installation has the same steps and only looks different. For information about performing non-interactive automated installations, see Book “AutoYaST Guide”.

  • 9 Registering SUSE Linux Enterprise and Managing Modules/Extensions
  • To get technical support and product updates, you need to register and activate SUSE Linux Enterprise Server with the SUSE Customer Center. It is recommended to register during the installation, since this will enable you to install the system with the latest updates and patches available. However, if you are offline or want to skip the registration step, you can register at any time later from the installed system.

    Modules and extensions add features to your system and allow you to customize the system according to your needs. These components also need to be registered and can be managed with YaST or command line tools. For more details also refer to the Article “Modules and Extensions Quick Start”.

  • 10 Expert Partitioner
  • Sophisticated system configurations require specific disk setups. You can perform all common partitioning tasks during the installation.

  • 11 Remote Installation
  • The installation of SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server can be fully performed over the network. This chapter describes how to provide the required environment for booting, installing and controlling the installation via the network.

  • 12 Troubleshooting
  • This section highlights some typical problems you may run into during installation and offers possible solutions or workarounds.

7 Boot Parameters

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server allows setting several parameters during boot, for example choosing the source of the installation data or setting the network configuration.

Using the appropriate set of boot parameters helps simplify your installation procedure. Many parameters can also be configured later using the linuxrc routines, but using the boot parameters is easier. In some automated setups, the boot parameters can be provided with initrd or an info file.

The way the system is started for the installation depends on the architecture—system start-up is different for PC (AMD64/Intel 64) or mainframe, for example. If you install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server as a VM Guest on a KVM or Xen hypervisor, follow the instructions for the AMD64/Intel 64 architecture.

Note
Note: Boot Options and Boot Parameters

The terms Boot Parameters and Boot Options are often used interchangeably. In this documentation, we mostly use the term Boot Parameters.

7.1 Using the Default Boot Parameters

The boot parameters are described in detail in Chapter 8, Installation Steps. Generally, selecting Installation starts the installation boot process.

If problems occur, use Installation—ACPI Disabled or Installation—Safe Settings. For more information about troubleshooting the installation process, refer to Chapter 12, Troubleshooting.

The menu bar at the bottom of the screen offers some advanced functionality needed in some setups. Using the function keys (F1 ... F12), you can specify additional options to pass to the installation routines without having to know the detailed syntax of these parameters (see Chapter 7, Boot Parameters). A detailed description of the available function keys is available in Section 7.2.1, “The Boot Screen on Machines Equipped with Traditional BIOS”.

7.2 PC (AMD64/Intel 64/AArch64)

This section describes changing the boot parameters for AMD64, Intel 64, and AArch64.

7.2.1 The Boot Screen on Machines Equipped with Traditional BIOS

The boot screen displays several options for the installation procedure. Boot from Hard Disk boots the installed system and is selected by default, because the CD is often left in the drive. Select one of the other options with the arrow keys and press Enter to boot it. The relevant options are:

Installation

The normal installation mode. All modern hardware functions are enabled. In case the installation fails, see F5Kernel for boot parameters that disable potentially problematic functions.

Upgrade

Perform a system upgrade. For more information refer to Book “Upgrade Guide”, Chapter 1 “Upgrade Paths and Methods”.

More › Rescue System

Starts a minimal Linux system without a graphical user interface. For more information, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 43 “Common problems and their solutions”, Section 43.5.2 “Using the Rescue System”.

More › Boot Linux System

Boot a Linux system that is already installed. You will be asked from which partition to boot the system.

More › Check Installation Media

This option is only available when you install from media created from downloaded ISOs. In this case it is recommended to check the integrity of the installation medium. This option starts the installation system before automatically checking the media. In case the check was successful, the normal installation routine starts. If a corrupt media is detected, the installation routine aborts. Replace the broken medium and restart the installation process.

More › Memory Test

Tests your system RAM using repeated read and write cycles. Terminate the test by rebooting. For more information, see Section 12.4, “Boot Failure”.

The Boot Screen on Machines with a Traditional BIOS
Figure 7.1: The Boot Screen on Machines with a Traditional BIOS

Use the function keys shown at the bottom of the screen to change the language, screen resolution, installation source or to add an additional driver from your hardware vendor:

F1Help

Get context-sensitive help for the active element of the boot screen. Use the arrow keys to navigate, Enter to follow a link, and Esc to leave the help screen.

F2Language

Select the display language and a corresponding keyboard layout for the installation. The default language is English (US).

F3Video Mode

Select various graphical display modes for the installation. By Default the video resolution is automatically determined using KMS (Kernel Mode Setting). If this setting does not work on your system, choose No KMS and, optionally, specify vga=ask on the boot command line to get prompted for the video resolution. Choose Text Mode if the graphical installation causes problems.

F4Source

Normally, the installation is performed from the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or NFS servers. If the installation is deployed on a network with an SLP server, select an installation source available on the server with this option. Find information about setting up an installation server with SLP at Chapter 16, Setting Up a Network Installation Source.

F5Kernel

If you encounter problems with the regular installation, this menu offers to disable a few potentially problematic functions. If your hardware does not support ACPI (advanced configuration and power interface) select No ACPI to install without ACPI support. No local APIC disables support for APIC (Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controllers) which may cause problems with some hardware. Safe Settings boots the system with the DMA mode (for CD/DVD-ROM drives) and power management functions disabled.

If you are not sure, try the following options first: Installation—ACPI Disabled or Installation—Safe Settings. Experts can also use the command line (Boot Options) to enter or change kernel parameters.

F6Driver

Press this key to notify the system that you have an optional driver update for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. With File or URL, load drivers directly before the installation starts. If you select Yes, you are prompted to insert the update disk at the appropriate point in the installation process.

Tip
Tip: Getting Driver Update Disks

Driver updates for SUSE Linux Enterprise are provided at http://drivers.suse.com/. These drivers have been created via the SUSE SolidDriver Program.

7.2.2 The Boot Screen on Machines Equipped with UEFI

UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) is a new industry standard which replaces and extends the traditional BIOS. The latest UEFI implementations contain the Secure Boot extension, which prevents booting malicious code by only allowing signed boot loaders to be executed. See Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 13 “UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface)” for more information.

The boot manager GRUB 2, used to boot machines with a traditional BIOS, does not support UEFI, therefore GRUB 2 is replaced with GRUB 2 for EFI. If Secure Boot is enabled, YaST will automatically select GRUB 2 for EFI for installation. From an administrative and user perspective, both boot manager implementations behave the same and are called GRUB 2 in the following.

Tip
Tip: Using Additional Drivers with Secure Boot

When installing with Secure Boot enabled, you cannot load drivers that are not shipped with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. This is also true of drivers shipped via SolidDriver, because their signing key is not trusted by default.

To load drivers not shipped with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, do either of the following:

  • Before the installation, add the needed keys to the firmware database via firmware/system management tools.

  • Use a bootable ISO that will enroll the needed keys in the MOK list on the first boot.

For more information, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 13 “UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface)”, Section 13.1 “Secure Boot”.

The boot screen displays several options for the installation procedure. Change the selected option with the arrow keys and press Enter to boot it. The relevant options are:

Installation

The normal installation mode. All modern hardware functions are enabled. In case the installation fails, see F5Kernel for boot parameters that disable potentially problematic functions.

Upgrade

Perform a system upgrade. For more information refer to Book “Upgrade Guide”, Chapter 1 “Upgrade Paths and Methods”.

More › Rescue System

Starts a minimal Linux system without a graphical user interface. For more information, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 43 “Common problems and their solutions”, Section 43.5.2 “Using the Rescue System”.

More › Boot Linux System

Boot a Linux system that is already installed. You will be asked from which partition to boot the system.

More › Check Installation Media

This option is only available when you install from media created from downloaded ISOs. In this case it is recommended to check the integrity of the installation medium. This option starts the installation system before automatically checking the media. In case the check was successful, the normal installation routine starts. If a corrupt media is detected, the installation routine aborts.

The Boot Screen on Machines with UEFI
Figure 7.2: The Boot Screen on Machines with UEFI

GRUB 2 for EFI on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server does not support a boot prompt or function keys for adding boot parameters. By default, the installation will be started with American English and the boot media as the installation source. A DHCP lookup will be performed to configure the network. To change these defaults or to add boot parameters you need to edit the respective boot entry. Highlight it using the arrow keys and press E. See the on-screen help for editing hints (note that only an English keyboard is available now). The Installation entry will look similar to the following:

setparams 'Installation'

   set gfxpayload=keep
   echo 'Loading kernel ...'
   linuxefi /boot/x86_64/loader/linux splash=silent
   echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...'
   initrdefi /boot/x86_64/loader/initrd

Add space-separated parameters to the end of the line starting with linuxefi. To boot the edited entry, press F10. If you access the machine via serial console, press Esc0. A complete list of parameters is available at https://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc.

7.3 List of Important Boot Parameters

This section contains a selection of important boot parameters.

7.3.1 General Boot Parameters

autoyast=URL

The autoyast parameter specifies the location of the autoinst.xml control file for automatic installation.

manual=<0|1>

The manual parameter controls whether the other parameters are only default values that still must be acknowledged by the user. Set this parameter to 0 if all values should be accepted and no questions asked. Setting autoyast implies setting manual to 0.

Info=URL

Specifies a location for a file from which to read additional options.

IBM Z This helps to overcome the limitations of 10 lines (and 80 characters per line under z/VM) for the parmfile. More documentation on the Info file can be found in Book “AutoYaST Guide”, Chapter 6 “The Auto-Installation Process”, Section 6.3.3 “Combining the linuxrc info File with the AutoYaST Control File”. Since the Info file can typically only be accessed through the network on IBM Z, you cannot use it to specify options required to set up the network (these options are described in Section 7.3.2, “Configuring the Network Interface”). Also other linuxrc specific options such as for debugging need to be specified in the parmfile to be effective.

upgrade=<0|1>

To upgrade SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, specify Upgrade=1.

IBM Z A custom parmfile is required for upgrading an existing installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise. Without this parameter, the installation provides no upgrade option.

dud=URL

Load driver updates from URL.

Set dud=ftp://ftp.example.com/PATH_TO_DRIVER or dud=http://www.example.com/PATH_TO_DRIVER to load drivers from a URL. When dud=1 you will be asked for the URL during boot.

language=LANGUAGE

Set the installation language. Some supported values are cs_CZ, de_DE, es_ES, fr_FR, ja_JP, pt_BR, pt_PT, ru_RU, zh_CN, and zh_TW.

acpi=off

Disable ACPI support.

noapic

No logical APIC.

nomodeset

Disable KMS.

textmode=1

Start installer in text mode.

console=SERIAL_DEVICE[,MODE]

SERIAL_DEVICE can be an actual serial or parallel device (for example ttyS0) or a virtual terminal (for example tty1). MODE is the baud rate, parity and stop bit (for example 9600n8). The default for this setting is set by the mainboard firmware. If you do not see output on your monitor, try setting console=tty1. It is possible to define multiple devices.

7.3.2 Configuring the Network Interface

Important
Important: Configuring the Network Interface

The settings discussed in this section apply only to the network interface used during installation. Configure additional network interfaces in the installed system by following the instructions given in Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.5 “Configuring a Network Connection Manually”.

The network will only be configured if it is required during the installation. To force the network to be configured, use the netsetup or ifcfg parameters.

netsetup=VALUE

netsetup=dhcp forces a configuration via DHCP. Set netsetup=-dhcp when configuring the network with the boot parameters hostip, gateway and nameserver. With the option netsetup=hostip,netmask,gateway,nameserver the installer asks for the network settings during boot.

ifcfg=INTERFACE[.VLAN]=[.try,]SETTINGS

INTERFACE can be * to match all interfaces or, for example, eth* to match all interfaces that start with eth. It is also possible to use MAC addresses as values.

Optionally, a VLAN can be set behind the interface name, separated by a period.

If SETTINGS is dhcp, all matching interfaces will be configured with DHCP. If you add the try option, configuration will stop once the installation repository can be reached via one of the configured interfaces.

Alternativey you use static configuration. With static parameters, only the first matching interface will be configured, unless you add the try option. This will configure all interfaces until the repository can be reached.

The syntax for the static configuration is:

ifcfg=*="IPS_NETMASK,GATEWAYS,NAMESERVERS,DOMAINS"

Each comma separated value can in turn contain a list of space character separated values. IPS_NETMASK is in the CIDR notation, for example 10.0.0.1/24. The quotes are only needed when using space character separated lists. Example with two name servers:

ifcfg=*="10.0.0.10/24,10.0.0.1,10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2,example.com"
Tip
Tip: Other Networking Parameters

The ifcfg boot parameter is very powerful and allows you to set almost all networking parameters. In addition to the parameters mentioned above, you can set values for all configuration options (comma separated) from /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg.template and /etc/sysconfig/network/config. The following example sets a custom MTU size on an interface otherwise configured via DHCP:

ifcfg=eth0=dhcp,MTU=1500
hostname=host.example.com

Enter the fully qualified host name.

domain=example.com

Domain search path for DNS. Allows you to use short host names instead of fully qualified ones.

hostip=192.168.1.2[/24]

Enter the IP address of the interface to configure. The IP can contain the subnet mask, for example hostip=192.168.1.2/24. This setting is only evaluated if the network is required during the installation.

gateway=192.168.1.3

Specify the gateway to use. This setting is only evaluated if the network is required during the installation.

nameserver=192.168.1.4

Specify the DNS server in charge. This setting is only evaluated if the network is required during the installation.

domain=example.com

Domain search path. This setting is only evaluated if the network is required during the installation.

7.3.3 Specifying the Installation Source

If you are not using DVD or USB flash drive for installation, specify an alternative installation source.

install=SOURCE

Specify the location of the installation source to use. Possible protocols are cd, hd, slp, nfs, smb (Samba/CIFS), ftp, tftp http, and https. Not all source types are available on all platforms. For example IBM Z does not support cd and hd.

The default option is cd.

If an ftp, tftp or smb URL is given, specify the user name and password with the URL. These parameters are optional and anonymous or guest login is assumed if they are not given. Example:

install=ftp://USER:PASSWORD@SERVER/DIRECTORY/DVD1/

To install over an encrypted connection, use an https URL. If the certificate cannot be verified, use the sslcerts=0 boot parameter to disable certificate checking.

In case of a Samba or CIFS installation, you can also specify the domain that should be used:

install=smb://WORKDOMAIN;USER:PASSWORD@SERVER/DIRECTORY/DVD1/

To use cd, hd or slp, set them as the following example:

install=cd:/
install=hd:/?device=sda/PATH_TO_ISO
install=slp:/

7.3.4 Specifying Remote Access

Only one of the different remote control methods should be specified at a time. The different methods are: SSH, VNC, remote X server. For information about how to use the parameters listed in this section, see Chapter 11, Remote Installation.

display_ip=IP_ADDRESS

Display_IP causes the installing system to try to connect to an X server at the given address.

Important
Important: X Authentication Mechanism

The direct installation with the X Window System relies on a primitive authentication mechanism based on host names. This mechanism is disabled on current SUSE Linux Enterprise Server versions. Installation with SSH or VNC is preferred.

vnc=1

Enables a VNC server during the installation.

vncpassword=PASSWORD

Sets the password for the VNC server.

ssh=1

ssh enables SSH installation.

ssh.password=PASSWORD

Specifies an SSH password for the root user during installation.

7.4 Advanced Setups

To configure access to a local RMT or supportconfig server for the installation, you can specify boot parameters to set up these services during installation. The same applies if you need IPv6 support during the installation.

7.4.1 Providing Data to Access an RMT Server

By default, updates for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are delivered by the SUSE Customer Center. If your network provides a so called RMT server to provide a local update source, you need to equip the client with the server's URL. Client and server communicate solely via HTTPS protocol, therefore you also need to enter a path to the server's certificate if the certificate was not issued by a certificate authority.

Note
Note: Non-Interactive Installation Only

Providing parameters for accessing an RMT server is only needed for non-interactive installations. During an interactive installation the data can be provided during the installation (see Section 8.7, “Registration” for details).

regurl

URL of the RMT server. This URL has a fixed format of https://FQN/center/regsvc/. FQN needs to be a fully qualified host name of the RMT server. Example:

regurl=https://smt.example.com/center/regsvc/

Make sure the values you enter are correct. If regurl has not been specified correctly, the registration of the update source will fail.

regcert

Location of the RMT server's certificate. Specify one of the following locations:

URL

Remote location (HTTP, HTTPS or FTP) from which the certificate can be downloaded. In case regcert is not specified, it will default to http://FQN/smt.crt with FQN being the name of the RMT server. Example:

regcert=http://rmt.example.com/smt-ca.crt
local path

Absolute path to the certificate on the local machine. Example:

regcert=/data/inst/smt/smt-ca.cert
Interactive

Use ask to open a pop-up menu during the installation where you can specify the path to the certificate. Do not use this option with AutoYaST. Example

regcert=ask
Deactivate certificate installation

Use done if the certificate will be installed by an add-on product, or if you are using a certificate issued by an official certificate authority. For example:

regcert=done

7.4.2 Configuring an Alternative Data Server for supportconfig

The data that supportconfig (see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 42 “Gathering System Information for Support” for more information) gathers is sent to the SUSE Customer Center by default. It is also possible to set up a local server to collect this data. If such a server is available on your network, you need to set the server's URL on the client. This information needs to be entered at the boot prompt.

supporturl URL of the server. The URL has the format http://FQN/Path/, where FQN is the fully qualified host name of the server and Path is the location on the server. For example:

supporturl=http://support.example.com/supportconfig/data/

7.4.3 Using IPv6 for the Installation

By default you can only assign IPv4 network addresses to your machine. To enable IPv6 during installation, enter one of the following parameters at the boot prompt:

Accept IPv4 and IPv6
ipv6=1
Accept IPv6 only
ipv6only=1

7.4.4 Using a Proxy for the Installation

In networks enforcing the usage of a proxy server for accessing remote web sites, registration during installation is only possible when configuring a proxy server.

On systems with traditional BIOS, press F4 on the boot screen and set the required parameters in the HTTP Proxy dialog.

On Systems with UEFI BIOS, provide the boot parameter proxy at the boot prompt:

  1. On the boot screen, press E to edit the boot menu.

  2. Append the proxy parameter to the linux line in the following format:

    proxy=https://proxy.example.com:PORT

    If the proxy server requires authentication, add the credentials as follows:

    proxy=https://USER:PASSWORD@proxy.example.com:PORT

    If the proxy server's SSL certificate cannot be verified, disable certificate checking with the sslcerts=0 boot parameter.

    The outcome will be similar to the following:

    GRUB options editor
    Figure 7.3: GRUB options editor
  3. Press F10 to boot with the new proxy setting.

7.4.5 Enabling SELinux Support

Enabling SELinux upon installation start-up enables you to configure it after the installation has been finished without having to reboot. Use the following parameters:

security=selinux selinux=1

7.4.6 Enabling the Installer Self-Update

During installation and upgrade, YaST can update itself as described in Section 8.2, “Installer Self-Update” to solve potential bugs discovered after release. The self_update parameter can be used to modify the behavior of this feature.

To enable the installer self-update, set the parameter to 1:

self_update=1

To use a user-defined repository, specify a URL:

self_update=https://updates.example.com/

7.4.7 Scale User Interface for High DPI

If your screen uses a very high DPI, use the boot parameter QT_AUTO_SCREEN_SCALE_FACTOR. This scales font and user interface elements to the screen DPI.

QT_AUTO_SCREEN_SCALE_FACTOR=1

7.4.8 Using CPU Mitigations

The boot parameter mitigations lets you control mitigation options for side-channel attacks on affected CPUs. Its possible values are:

auto Enables all mitigations required for your CPU model, but does not protect against cross-CPU thread attacks. This setting may impact performance to some degree, depending on the workload.

nosmt Provides the full set of available security mitigations. Enables all mitigations required for your CPU model. In addition, it disables Simultaneous Multithreading (SMT) to avoid side-channel attacks across multiple CPU threads. This setting may further impact performance, depending on the workload.

off Disables all mitigations. Side-channel attacks against your CPU are possible, depending on the CPU model. This setting has no impact on performance.

Each value comes with a set of specific parameters, depending on the CPU architecture, the kernel version, and on the vulnerabilities that need to be mitigated. Refer to the kernel documentation for details.

7.5 IBM Z

For IBM Z platforms, the system is booted (IPL, Initial Program Load) as described in Section 5.3.4, “IPLing the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Installation System”. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server does not show a splash screen on these systems. During the installation, load the kernel, initrd, and parmfile manually. YaST starts with its installation screen when a connection has been established to the installation system via VNC, X, or SSH. Because there is no splash screen, kernel or boot parameters cannot be entered on screen, but must be specified in a parmfile (see Section 5.5, “The Parmfile—Automating the System Configuration”).

InstNetDev=osa

Enter the type of interface to configure. Possible values are osa, hsi, ctc, escon, and iucv (CTC, ESCON, and IUCV are no longer supported).

For the interfaces of type hsi and osa, specify an appropriate netmask and an optional broadcast address:

Netmask=255.255.255.0
Broadcast=192.168.255.255

For the interfaces of type ctc, escon, and iucv (CTC, ESCON, and IUCV are no longer supported), enter the IP address of the peer:

Pointopoint=192.168.55.20
OsaInterface=<lcs|qdio>

For osa network devices, specify the host interface (qdio or lcs).

Layer2=<0|1>

For osa QDIO Ethernet and hsi devices, specify whether to enable (1) or disable (0) OSI Layer 2 support.

OSAHWAddr=02:00:65:00:01:09

For Layer 2-enabled osa QDIO Ethernet devices, either specify a MAC address manually or state OSAHWADDR= (with trailing white space) for the system default.

PortNo=<0|1>

For osa network devices, specify the port number (provided the device supports this feature). The default value is 0.

Each of the interfaces requires certain setup options:

  • Interfaces ctc and escon (CTC and ESCON are no longer supported):

    ReadChannel=0.0.0600
    WriteChannel=0.0.0601

    ReadChannel specifies the READ channel to use. WriteChannel specifies the WRITE channel.

  • For the ctc interface (no longer supported), specify the protocol that should be used for this interface:

    CTCProtocol=<0/1/2>

    Valid entries would be:

    0

    Compatibility mode, also for non-Linux peers other than OS/390 and z/OS (this is the default mode)

    1

    Extended mode

    2

    Compatibility mode with OS/390 and z/OS

  • Network device type osa with interface lcs:

    ReadChannel=0.0.0124

    ReadChannel stands for the channel number used in this setup. A second port number can be derived from this by adding one to ReadChannel. Portnumber is used to specify the relative port.

  • Interface iucv:

    IUCVPeer=PEER

    Enter the name of the peer machine.

  • Network device type osa with interface qdio for OSA-Express Gigabit Ethernet:

    ReadChannel=0.0.0700
    WriteChannel=0.0.0701
    DataChannel=0.0.0702

    For ReadChannel, enter the number of the READ channel. For WriteChannel, enter the number of the WRITE channel. DataChannel specifies the DATA channel. Make sure that the READ channel carries an even device number.

  • Interface hsi for HiperSockets and VM guest LANs:

    ReadChannel=0.0.0800
    WriteChannel=0.0.0801
    DataChannel=0.0.0802

    For ReadChannel, enter the appropriate number for the READ channel. For WriteChannel and DataChannel, enter the WRITE and DATA channel numbers.

7.6 More Information

You can find more information about boot parameters in the openSUSE wiki at https://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Linuxrc#Parameter_Reference.

8 Installation Steps

This chapter describes the procedure in which the data for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is copied to the target device. Some basic configuration parameters for the newly installed system are set during the procedure. A graphical user interface will guide you through the installation. The procedure described in the following also applies to remote installation procedures as described in Chapter 11, Remote Installation. The text mode installation has the same steps and only looks different. For information about performing non-interactive automated installations, see Book “AutoYaST Guide”.

Before running the installer, read Part I, “Installation Preparation”. Depending on the architecture of your system, it describes the steps necessary to start the installation.

If you are a first-time user of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, you should follow the default YaST proposals in most parts, but you can also adjust the settings as described here to fine-tune your system according to your preferences. Help for each installation step is provided by clicking Help.

Tip
Tip: Installation Without a Mouse

If the installer does not detect your mouse correctly, use →| for navigation, arrow keys to scroll, and Enter to confirm a selection. Various buttons or selection fields contain a letter with an underscore. Use AltLetter to select a button or a selection directly instead of navigating there with →|.

8.1 Overview

This section provides an overview of all installation steps. Each step contains a link to a more detailed description.

  1. Before the installation starts, the installer can update itself. For details, see Section 8.2, “Installer Self-Update”.

  2. The actual installation starts with choosing the language and the product. For details, see Section 8.3, “ Language, Keyboard, and Product Selection.

  3. Accept the license agreement. For details, see Section 8.4, “License Agreement”.

  4. IBM Z machines need to activate disks. For details, see Section 8.5, “IBM Z: Disk Activation”.

  5. Configure the network. This is only required when you need network access during the installation and the automatic network configuration via DHCP failed. If the automatic network configuration succeeded, this step is skipped. For details, see Section 8.6, “Network Settings”.

  6. With a working network connection you can register the machine at the SUSE Customer Center or an RMT server. For details, see Section 8.7, “Registration”.

  7. Select the modules you want to enable for the machine. This impacts the availability of system roles in the next step and packages later on. For details, see Section 8.8, “Extension and Module Selection”.

  8. You can manually add repositories. For details, see Section 8.9, “Add-On Product”.

  9. Select a role for your system. Among other things, this defines the default list of packages to install and makes a suggestion for partitioning the hard disks. For details, see Section 8.10, “System Role”.

  10. Partition the hard disks of your system. For details, see Section 8.11, “Partitioning”.

  11. Choose a time zone. For details, see Section 8.12, “Clock and Time Zone”.

  12. Create a user. For details, see Section 8.13, “Create New User”.

  13. Optionally, set a different password for the system administrator root. For details, see Section 8.14, “Authentication for the System Administrator root.

  14. In a final step, the installer presents an overview of all settings. If required, you can change them. For details, see Section 8.15, “Installation Settings”.

  15. The installer copies all required data and informs you about the progress. For details, see Section 8.16, “Performing the Installation”.

8.2 Installer Self-Update

During the installation and upgrade process, YaST can update itself to solve bugs in the installer that were discovered after the release. This functionality is enabled by default; to disable it, set the boot parameter self_update to 0. For more information, see Section 7.4.6, “Enabling the Installer Self-Update”.

Important
Important: Quarterly Media Update: Self-Update Disabled

The installer self-update is only available if you use the GM images of the Unified Installer and Packages ISOs. If you install from the ISOs published as quarterly update (they can be identified by the string QU in the name), the installer cannot update itself, because this feature has been disabled in the update media.

Important
Important: Networking during Self-Update

To download installer updates, YaST needs network access. By default, it tries to use DHCP on all network interfaces. If there is a DHCP server in the network, it will work automatically.

If you need a static IP setup, you can use the ifcfg boot argument. For more details, see the linuxrc documentation at https://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc.

Tip
Tip: Language Selection

The installer self-update is executed before the language selection step. This means that progress and errors which happen during this process are displayed in English by default.

To use another language for this part of the installer, use the language boot parameter if available for your architecture, for example, language=de_DE. On machines equipped with a traditional BIOS, alternatively, press F2 in the boot menu and select the language from the list.

Although this feature was designed to run without user intervention, it is worth knowing how it works. If you are not interested, you can jump directly to Section 8.3, “ Language, Keyboard, and Product Selection and skip the rest of this section.

8.2.1 Self-Update Process

The process can be broken down into two different parts:

  1. Determine the update repository location.

  2. Download and apply the updates to the installation system.

8.2.1.1 Determining the Update Repository Location

Installer Self-Updates are distributed as regular RPM packages via a dedicated repository, so the first step is to find out the repository URL.

Important
Important: Installer Self-Update Repository Only

No matter which of the following options you use, only the installer self-update repository URL is expected, for example:

self_update=https://www.example.com/my_installer_updates/

Do not supply any other repository URL—for example the URL of the software update repository.

YaST will try the following sources of information:

  1. The self_update boot parameter. (For more details, see Section 7.4.6, “Enabling the Installer Self-Update”.) If you specify a URL, it will take precedence over any other method.

  2. The /general/self_update_url profile element in case you are using AutoYaST.

  3. A registration server. YaST will query the registration server for the URL. The server to be used is determined in the following order:

    1. By evaluating the regurl boot parameter (Section 7.4.1, “Providing Data to Access an RMT Server”).

    2. By evaluating the /suse_register/reg_server profile element if you are using AutoYaST.

    3. By performing an SLP lookup. If an SLP server is found, YaST will ask you whether it should be used because there is no authentication involved and everybody on the local network could announce a registration server.

    4. By querying the SUSE Customer Center.

  4. If none of the previous attempts worked, the fallback URL (defined in the installation media) will be used.

8.2.1.2 Downloading and Applying the Updates

When the updates repository is determined, YaST will check whether an update is available. If so, all the updates will be downloaded and applied to the installation system.

Finally, YaST will be restarted to load the new version and the welcome screen will be shown. If no updates were available, the installation will continue without restarting YaST.

Note
Note: Update Integrity

Update signatures will be checked to ensure integrity and authorship. If a signature is missing or invalid, you will be asked whether you want to apply the update.

8.2.1.3 Temporary Self-Update Add-on Repository

Some packages distributed in the self-update repository provide additional data for the installer, like the installation defaults, system role definitions and similar. If the installer finds such packages in the self-update repository, a local temporary repository is created, to which those packages are copied. They are used during the installation process, but at the end of the installation, the temporary local repository is removed. Its packages are not installed onto the target system.

This additional repository is not displayed in the list of add-on products, but during installation it may still be visible as SelfUpdate0 repository in the package management.

8.2.2 Custom Self-Update Repositories

YaST can use a user-defined repository instead of the official one by specifying a URL through the self_update boot parameter. However, the following points should be considered:

  • Only HTTP/HTTPS and FTP repositories are supported.

  • Only RPM-MD repositories are supported (required by RMT).

  • Packages are not installed in the usual way: They are uncompressed only and no scripts are executed.

  • No dependency checks are performed. Packages are installed in alphabetical order.

  • Files from the packages override the files from the original installation media. This means that the update packages might not need to contain all files, only files that have changed. Unchanged files are omitted to save memory and download bandwidth.

Note
Note: Only One Repository

Currently, it is not possible to use more than one repository as source for installer self-updates.

8.3 Language, Keyboard, and Product Selection

Language, Keyboard, and Product Selection
Figure 8.1: Language, Keyboard, and Product Selection

The Language and Keyboard Layout settings are initialized with the language you chose on the boot screen. If you did not change the default, it will be English (US). Change the settings here, if necessary.

Changing the language will automatically preselect a corresponding keyboard layout. Override this proposal by selecting a different keyboard layout from the drop-down box. Use the Keyboard Test text box to test the layout. The language selected here is also used to assume a time zone for the system clock. This setting can be modified later in the installed system as described in Chapter 25, Changing Language and Country Settings with YaST.

With the Unified Installer you can install all SUSE Linux Enterprise base products:

Select a product for installation. You need to have a registration code for the respective product. In this document it is assumed you have chosen SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Proceed with Next.

Tip
Tip: Hight contrast color scheme

If you are having difficulties to read the labels in the installer, press ShiftF4 to switch to the color scheme for vision impaired users. Press the buttons again to switch back to the default scheme.

8.4 License Agreement

License Agreement
Figure 8.2: License Agreement

Read the License Agreement. It is presented in the language you have chosen on the boot screen. Translations are available via the License Language drop-down box. If you agree to the terms, check I Agree to the License Terms and click Next to proceed with the installation. If you do not agree to the license agreement, you cannot install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server; click Abort to terminate the installation.

8.5 IBM Z: Disk Activation

When installing on IBM Z platforms, the language selection dialog is followed by a dialog to configure the attached hard disks.

Disk Activation
Figure 8.3: Disk Activation

Select DASD, Fibre Channel Attached SCSI Disks (zFCP), or iSCSI for installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. The DASD and zFCP configuration buttons are only available if the corresponding devices are attached. For instructions on how to configure iSCSI disks, refer to Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 15 “Mass Storage over IP Networks: iSCSI”, Section 15.3 “Configuring iSCSI Initiator”.

You can also change the Network Configuration in this screen by launching the Network Settings dialog. Choose a network interface from the list and click Edit to change its settings. Use the tabs to configure DNS and routing. See Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.4 “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST” for more details.

8.5.1 Configuring DASD Disks

Skip this step if you are not installing on IBM Z hardware.

DASD Disk Management
Figure 8.4: DASD Disk Management

After selecting Configure DASD Disks, an overview lists all available DASDs. To get a clearer picture of the available devices, use the text box located above the list to specify a range of channels to display. To filter the list according to such a range, select Filter.

Specify the DASDs to use for the installation by selecting the corresponding entries in the list. Use Select All to select all DASDs currently displayed. Activate and make the selected DASDs available for the installation by selecting Perform Action › Activate. To format the DASDs, select Perform Action › Format. Alternatively, use the YaST partitioner later as described in Section 10.1, “Using the Expert Partitioner”.

8.5.2 Configuring zFCP Disks

To use zFCP disks for the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation, select Configure zFCP Disks in the selection dialog. This opens a dialog with a list of the zFCP disks available on the system. In this dialog, select Add to open another dialog in which to enter zFCP parameters.

To make a zFCP disk available for the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation, choose an available Channel Number from the drop-down box. Get WWPNs (World Wide Port Number) and Get LUNs (Logical Unit Number) return lists with available WWPNs and FCP-LUNs, respectively, to choose from. Automatic LUN scanning only works with NPIV enabled.

When completed, exit the zFCP dialog with Next and the general hard disk configuration dialog with Finish to continue with the rest of the configuration.

8.6 Network Settings

After booting into the installation, the installation routine is set up. During this setup, an attempt to configure at least one network interface with DHCP is made. In case this attempt has failed, the Network Settings dialog launches now.

Network Settings
Figure 8.5: Network Settings

Choose a network interface from the list and click Edit to change its settings. Use the tabs to configure DNS and routing. See Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.4 “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST” for more details. On IBM Z this dialog does not start automatically. It can be started in the Disk Activation step.

In case DHCP was successfully configured during installation setup, you can also access this dialog by clicking Network Configuration at the SUSE Customer Center Registration and the Installation Settings step. It lets you change the automatically provided settings.

Note
Note: Network Configuration with Boot Parameters

If at least one network interface has been configured via boot parameters (see Section 7.3.2, “Configuring the Network Interface”), automatic DHCP configuration is disabled and the boot parameter configuration is imported and used.

Tip
Tip: Accessing Network Storage or Local RAID

To access a SAN or a local RAID during the installation, you can use the libstorage command line client for this purpose:

  1. Switch to a console with CtrlAltF2.

  2. Install the libstoragemgmt extension by running extend libstoragemgmt.

  3. Now you have access to the lsmcli command. For more information, run lsmcli --help.

  4. To return to the installer, press AltF7

Supported are Netapp Ontap, all SMI-S compatible SAN providers, and LSI MegaRAID.

8.7 Registration

To get technical support and product updates, you need to register and activate SUSE Linux Enterprise Server with the SUSE Customer Center or a local registration server. Registering your product at this stage also grants you immediate access to the update repository. This enables you to install the system with the latest updates and patches available.

When registering, repositories and dependencies for the modules and extensions, which you install with the next step, are loaded from the registration server.

From this dialog, you can switch to the YaST Network Settings module by clicking Network Configuration. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.4 “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST”.

If you are offline or want to skip registration, activate Skip Registration. See Section 8.7.3, “Installing without Registration” for instructions.

8.7.1 Registering Manually

To register with the SUSE Customer Center, enter the E-mail Address associated with your SCC account and the Registration Code for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server..

If your organization provides a local registration server, you may alternatively register there. Activate Register System via local SMT Server and either choose a URL from the drop-down box or type in an address. Proceed with Next.

To register with the SUSE Customer Center, enter your Registration Code for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. If your organization provides a local registration server, you may alternatively register there. Activate Register System via local RMT Server and either choose a URL from the drop-down box or type in an address.

Start the registration process with Next.

SUSE Customer Center Registration
Figure 8.6: SUSE Customer Center Registration
Tip
Tip: Installing Product Patches at Installation Time

After SUSE Linux Enterprise Server has been successfully registered, you are asked whether to install the latest available online updates during the installation. If choosing Yes, the system will be installed with the most current packages without having to apply the updates after installation. Activating this option is recommended.

If the system was successfully registered during installation, YaST will disable repositories from local installation media such as CD/DVD or flash disks when the installation has been completed. This prevents problems if the installation source is no longer available and ensures that you always get the latest updates from the online repositories.

8.7.2 Loading Registration Codes from USB Storage

To make the registration more convenient, you can also store your registration codes on a USB storage device such as a flash disk. YaST will automatically pre-fill the corresponding text box. This is particularly useful when testing the installation or if you need to register many systems or extensions.

Create a file named regcodes.txt or regcodes.xml on the USB disk. If both are present, the XML takes precedence.

In that file, identify the product with the name returned by zypper search --type product and assign it a registration code as follows:

Example 8.1: regcodes.txt
SLES    cc36aae1
SLED    309105d4

sle-we  5eedd26a
sle-live-patching 8c541494
Example 8.2: regcodes.xml
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<profile xmlns="http://www.suse.com/1.0/yast2ns"
 xmlns:config="http://www.suse.com/1.0/configns">
  <suse_register>
    <addons config:type="list">
      <addon>
<name>SLES</name>
<reg_code>cc36aae1</reg_code>
      </addon>
      <addon>
<name>SLED</name>
<reg_code>309105d4</reg_code>
      </addon>
      <addon>
<name>sle-we</name>
<reg_code>5eedd26a</reg_code>
      </addon>
      <addon>
<name>sle-live-patching</name>
<reg_code>8c541494</reg_code>
      </addon>
    </addons>
  </suse_register>
</profile>

Note that SLES and SLED are not extensions, but listing them as add-ons allows for combining several base product registration codes in a single file. See Book “AutoYaST Guide”, Chapter 4 “Configuration and Installation Options”, Section 4.3.1 “Extensions” for details.

Note
Note: Limitations

Currently flash disks are only scanned during installation or upgrade, but not when registering a running system.

8.7.3 Installing without Registration

If you are offline or want to skip registration, activate Skip Registration. Accept the warning with OK and proceed with Next.

Important
Important: Skipping the Registration

Your system and extensions need to be registered to retrieve updates and to be eligible for support. Skipping the registration is only possible when installing from the SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso image.

Installing without Registration
Figure 8.7: Installing without Registration
Note
Note: Registering SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

Your system and extensions need to be registered to retrieve updates and to be eligible for support. If you do not register during the installation, you can do so at any time later from the running system. To do so, run YaST › Product Registration.

Tip
Tip: Copying the Installation Media Image to a Removable Flash Disk

Use the following command to copy the contents of the installation image to a removable flash disk.

> sudo dd if=IMAGE of=FLASH_DISK bs=4M && sync

IMAGE needs to be replaced with the path to the SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso or SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso image file. FLASH_DISK needs to be replaced with the flash device. To identify the device, insert it and run:

# grep -Ff <(hwinfo --disk --short) <(hwinfo --usb --short)
     disk:
     /dev/sdc             General USB Flash Disk

Make sure the size of the device is sufficient for the desired image. You can check the size of the device with:

# fdisk -l /dev/sdc | grep -e "^/dev"
     /dev/sdc1  *     2048 31490047 31488000  15G 83 Linux

In this example, the device has a capacity of 15 GB. The command to use for the SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso would be:

dd if=SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso of=/dev/sdc bs=4M && sync

The device must not be mounted when running the dd command. Note that all data on the partition will be erased!

8.8 Extension and Module Selection

In this dialog the installer lists modules and extensions that are available for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Modules are components which allow you to shape the product according to your needs. They are free of charge. Extensions add functionality to your product. They are offered as subscriptions and require a registration key that is liable for costs.

The availability of certain modules or extensions depends on the product you chose in the first step of this installation. For a description of the modules and their life cycles, select a module to see the accompanying text. More detailed information is available in the Release Notes.

The selection of modules indirectly affects the scope of the installation, because it defines which software sources (repositories) are available for installation and in the running system.

Extension and Module Selection
Figure 8.8: Extension and Module Selection

The following modules and extensions are available for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server:

Basesystem Module

This module adds a basic system on top of the Unified Installer. It is required by all other modules and extensions. The scope of an installation that only contains the base system is comparable to the installation pattern minimal system of previous SUSE Linux Enterprise Server versions. This module is selected for installation by default and should not be deselected.

Dependencies: None

Containers Module

Contains support and tools for containers.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Desktop Applications Module

Adds a graphical user interface and essential desktop applications to the system.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Development Tools Module

Contains compilers (including gcc) and libraries required for compiling and debugging applications. Replaces the former Software Development Kit (SDK).

Dependencies: Basesystem, Desktop Applications

Legacy Module

Helps you migrating applications from earlier versions of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server and other systems to SLES 15 SP2, by providing packages which are discontinued on SUSE Linux Enterprise. Packages in this module are selected based on the requirement for migration and the level of complexity of configuration.

This module is recommended when migrating from a previous product version.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

NVIDIA Compute Module

Contains the NVIDIA CUDA (Compute Unified Device Architecture) drivers.

The software in this module is provided by NVIDIA under the CUDA End User License Agreement and not supported by SUSE.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Public Cloud Module

Contains all tools required to create images for deploying SUSE Linux Enterprise Server in cloud environments such as the Amazon Web Services (AWS), Microsoft Azure, Google Compute Platform, or OpenStack.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

Python 2 Module

SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 SP2 uses Python version 3. This module contains the Python 2 runtime and modules.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Server Applications Module

Adds server functionality by providing network services such as DHCP server, name server, or Web server. This module is selected for installation by default; deselecting it is not recommended.

Dependencies: Basesystem

SUSE Enterprise Storage

Adds support for distributed storage with Ceph to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Requires a separate license key.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

SUSE Linux Enterprise High Availability

Adds clustering support for mission critical setups to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. This extension requires a separate license key.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

SUSE Linux Enterprise Live Patching

Adds support for performing critical patching without having to shut down the system. This extension requires a separate license key.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

SUSE Linux Enterprise Workstation Extension

Extends the functionality of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server with packages from SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop, like additional desktop applications (office suite, e-mail client, graphical editor, etc.) and libraries. It allows to combine both products to create a fully featured workstation. This extension requires a separate license key.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Desktop Applications

SUSE Package Hub

Provides access to packages for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server maintained by the openSUSE community. These packages are delivered without L3 support and do not interfere with the supportability of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. For more information refer to https://packagehub.suse.com/.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Transactional Server Module

Adds support for transactional updates. Updates are either applied to the system all together in a single transaction, or not at all. This happens without influencing the running system. If an update fails, or if the successful update is deemed to be incompatible or otherwise incorrect, it can be discarded to immediately return the system to its previous functioning state.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Web and Scripting Module

Contains packages intended for a running Web server.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

Some modules depend on the installation of other modules. Therefore, when selecting a module, other modules may be selected automatically to fulfill dependencies.

Depending on the product, the registration server can mark modules and extensions as recommended. Recommended modules and extensions are preselected for registration and installation. To avoid installing these recommendations, deselect them manually.

Select the modules and extension you want to install and proceed with Next. In case you have chosen one or more extensions, you will be prompted to provide the respective registration codes. Depending on your choice, it may also be necessary to accept additional license agreements.

Important
Important: Default Modules for Offline Installation

When performing an offline installation from the SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso, only the Basesystem Module is selected by default. To install the complete default package set of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, additionally select the Server Applications Module.

8.9 Add-On Product

The Add On Product dialog allows you to add additional software sources (so-called repositories) to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, that are not provided by the SUSE Customer Center. Such add-on products may include third-party products and drivers or additional software for your system.

Add-On Product
Figure 8.9: Add-On Product

From this dialog, you can switch to the YaST Network Settings module by clicking Network Configuration. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.4 “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST”.

Tip
Tip: Adding Drivers during the Installation

You can also add driver update repositories via the Add On Product dialog. Driver updates for SUSE Linux Enterprise are provided at http://drivers.suse.com/. These drivers have been created via the SUSE SolidDriver Program.

If you do not want to install add-ons, proceed with Next. Otherwise activate I would like to install an additional Add On Product. Specify the Media Type by choosing from CD, DVD, Hard Disk, USB Mass Storage, a Local Directory or a Local ISO Image. If network access has been configured you can choose from additional remote sources such as HTTP, SLP, FTP, etc. Alternatively you may directly specify a URL. Check Download repository description files to download the files describing the repository now. If deactivated, they will be downloaded after the installation starts. Proceed with Next and insert a CD or DVD if required.

Depending on the add-on's content, it may be necessary to accept additional license agreements.

8.10 System Role

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server supports a broad range of features. To simplify the installation, the installer offers predefined use cases which adjust the system to be installed so it is tailored for the selected scenario.

System Role
Figure 8.10: System Role

Choose the System Role that meets your requirements best. The availability of system roles depends on your selection of modules and extensions. Therefore, the dialog is omitted under the following conditions:

  • If from the enabled modules no role is suitable for the respective base product. In this case, the installation proceeds with the default settings for this product.

  • If from the enabled modules only one role is suitable for the respective base product. In this case, the installation proceeds with the settings of this particular role.

With the default selection, the following system roles are available:

Text Mode

This option installs a basic SLES without a desktop environment but with a rich set of command line tools.

Dependencies: Basesystem

Minimal

Select this role if you want a very small installation with only the basic command line tools.

Dependencies: None

KVM Virtualization Host

Select this scenario when installing on a machine that should serve as a KVM host that can run other virtual machines. /var/lib/libvirt will be placed on a separate partition and the firewall and Kdump will be disabled.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

Xen Virtualization Host

Select this scenario when installing on a machine that should serve as a Xen host that can run other virtual machines. /var/lib/libvirt will be placed on a separate partition and the firewall and Kdump will be disabled.

Dependencies: Basesystem, Server Applications

8.11 Partitioning

8.11.1 Important Information

Warning
Warning: Read this Section Carefully

Read this section carefully before continuing with Section 8.11.2, “Suggested Partitioning”.

Custom Partitioning on UEFI Machines

A UEFI machine requires an EFI system partition that must be mounted to /boot/efi. This partition must be formatted with the FAT32 file system.

If an EFI system partition is already present on your system (for example from a previous Windows installation) use it by mounting it to /boot/efi without formatting it.

If no EFI system partition is present on your UEFI machine, make sure to create it. The EFI system partition must be a physical partition or RAID 1. Other RAID levels, LVM and other technologies are not supported. It needs to be formatted with the FAT32 file system.

Custom Partitioning and Snapper

If the root partition is larger than 16 GB, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server by default enables file system snapshots.

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server uses Snapper together with Btrfs for this feature. Btrfs needs to be set up with snapshots enabled for the root partition.

If the disk is smaller than 16 GB, all Snapper features and automatic snapshots are disabled to prevent the system partition / from running out of space.

Being able to create system snapshots that enable rollbacks requires important system directories to be mounted on a single partition, for example /usr and /var. Only directories that are excluded from snapshots may reside on separate partitions, for example /usr/local, /var/log, and /tmp.

If snapshots are enabled, the installer will automatically create single snapshots during and immediately after the installation.

For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 7 “System Recovery and Snapshot Management with Snapper”.

Important
Important: Btrfs Snapshots and Root Partition Size

Snapshots occupy space on their partition. As a rule of thumb, the older a snapshot is, or the bigger the changeset they cover is, the bigger the snapshot. Plus, the more snapshots you keep, the more disk space you need.

To prevent the root partition running full with snapshot data, you need to make sure it is big enough. In case you do frequent updates or other installations, consider at least 30 GB for the root partition. If you plan to keep snapshots activated for a system upgrade or a service pack migration (to be able to roll back), you should consider 40 GB or more.

Btrfs Data Volumes

Using Btrfs for data volumes is supported on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP2. For applications that require Btrfs as a data volume, consider creating a separate file system with quota groups disabled. This is already the default for non-root file systems.

Btrfs on an Encrypted Root Partition

The default partitioning setup suggests the root partition as Btrfs. To encrypt the root partition, make sure to use the GPT partition table type instead of the MSDOS type. Otherwise the GRUB2 boot loader may not have enough space for the second stage loader.

IBM Z: Using Minidisks in z/VM

If SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is installed on minidisks in z/VM, which reside on the same physical disk, the access path of the minidisks (/dev/disk/by-id/) is not unique. This is because it represents the ID of the physical disk. If two or more minidisks are on the same physical disk, they all have the same ID.

To avoid problems when mounting minidisks, always mount them either by path or by UUID.

IBM Z: LVM Root File System

If you configure the system with a root file system on LVM or software RAID array, you must place /boot on a separate, non-LVM or non-RAID partition, otherwise the system will fail to boot. The recommended size for such a partition is 500 MB and the recommended file system is Ext4.

IBM POWER: Installing on Systems with Multiple Fibre Channel Disks

If more than one disk is available, the partitioning scheme suggested during the installation puts the PReP and BOOT partitions on different disks. If these disks are Fibre Channel Disks, the GRUB boot loader is not able to find the BOOT partition and the system cannot be booted.

When prompted to select the partition scheme during the installation, choose Guided Setup and verify that only one disk is selected for installation. Alternatively, run the Expert Partitioner and manually set up a partitioning scheme that has PRep and BOOT on a single disk.

Supported Software RAID Volumes

Installing to and booting from existing software RAID volumes is supported for Disk Data Format (DDF) volumes and Intel Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM) volumes. IMSM is also known by the following names:

Mount Points for FCoE and iSCSI Devices

FCoE and iSCSI devices will appear asynchronously during the boot process. While the initrd guarantees that those devices are set up correctly for the root file system, there are no such guarantees for any other file systems or mount points like /usr. Hence any system mount points like /usr or /var are not supported. To use those devices, ensure correct synchronization of the respective services and devices.

8.11.2 Suggested Partitioning

Define a partition setup for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server in this step.

Suggested Partitioning
Figure 8.11: Suggested Partitioning

Depending on the system role, the installer creates a proposal for one of the disks available. All proposals contain a root partition formatted with Btrfs (with snapshots enabled) and a swap partition. The GNOME desktop and the text mode proposals create a separate home partition on disks larger than 20 GB. The system roles for virtualization hosts create a separate partition for /var/lib/libvirt, the directory that hosts the image files by default. If one or more swap partitions have been detected on the available hard disks, these existing ones will be used (rather than proposing a new swap partition). You have several options to proceed:

Next

To accept the proposal without any changes, click Next to proceed with the installation workflow.

Guided Setup

To adjust the proposal, choose Guided Setup. First, choose which hard disks and partitions to use. In the Partitioning Scheme screen, you can enable Logical Volume Management (LVM) and activate disk encryption. Afterward specify the Filesystem Options. You can adjust the file system for the root partition and create a separate home and swap partitions. If you plan to suspend your machine, make sure to create a separate swap partition and check Enlarge to RAM Size for Suspend. If the root file system format is Btrfs, you can also enable or disable Btrfs snapshots here.

Expert Partitioner

To create a custom partition setup click Expert Partitioner. Select either Start with Current Proposal if you want start with the suggested disk layout, or Start with Existing Partitions to ignore the suggested layout and start with the existing layout on the disk. You can Add, Edit, Resize, or Delete partitions.

You can also set up Logical Volumes (LVM), configure software RAID and device mapping (DM), encrypt Partitions, mount NFS shares and manage tmpfs volumes with the Expert Partitioner. To fine-tune settings such as the subvolume and snapshot handling for each Btrfs partition, choose Btrfs. For more information about custom partitioning and configuring advanced features, refer to Section 10.1, “Using the Expert Partitioner”.

Warning
Warning: Disk Space Units

Note that for partitioning purposes, disk space is measured in binary units, rather than in decimal units. For example, if you enter sizes of 1GB, 1GiB or 1G, they all signify 1 GiB (Gibibyte), as opposed to 1 GB (Gigabyte).

Binary

1 GiB = 1 073 741 824 bytes.

Decimal

1 GB = 1 000 000 000 bytes.

Difference

1 GiB ≈ 1.07 GB.

8.12 Clock and Time Zone

In this dialog, select your region and time zone. Both are preselected according to the installation language.

Clock and Time Zone
Figure 8.12: Clock and Time Zone

To change the preselected values, either use the map or the drop-down boxes for Region and Time Zone. When using the map, point the cursor at the rough direction of your region and left-click to zoom. Now choose your country or region by left-clicking. Right-click to return to the world map.

To set up the clock, choose whether the Hardware Clock is Set to UTC. If you run another operating system on your machine, such as Microsoft Windows, it is likely your system uses local time instead. If you run Linux on your machine, set the hardware clock to UTC and have the switch from standard time to daylight saving time performed automatically.

Important
Important: Set the Hardware Clock to UTC

The switch from standard time to daylight saving time (and vice versa) can only be performed automatically when the hardware clock (CMOS clock) is set to UTC. This also applies if you use automatic time synchronization with NTP, because automatic synchronization will only be performed if the time difference between the hardware and system clock is less than 15 minutes.

Since a wrong system time can cause serious problems (missed backups, dropped mail messages, mount failures on remote file systems, etc.), it is strongly recommended to always set the hardware clock to UTC.

POWER, AMD/Intel If a network is already configured, you can configure time synchronization with an NTP server. Click Other Settings to either alter the NTP settings or to Manually set the time. See Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 30 “Time Synchronization with NTP” for more information on configuring the NTP service. When finished, click Accept to continue the installation.

POWER, AMD/Intel If running without NTP configured, consider setting SYSTOHC=no (sysconfig variable) to avoid saving unsynchronized time into the hardware clock.

Note
Note: Time Cannot Be Changed on IBM Z

Since the operating system is not allowed to change time and date directly, the Other Settings option is not available on IBM Z.

8.13 Create New User

Create a local user in this step.

Create New User
Figure 8.13: Create New User

After entering the first name and last name, either accept the proposal or specify a new User name that will be used to log in. Only use lowercase letters (a-z), digits (0-9) and the characters . (dot), - (hyphen) and _ (underscore). Special characters, umlauts and accented characters are not allowed.

Finally, enter a password for the user. Re-enter it for confirmation (to ensure that you did not type something else by mistake). To provide effective security, a password should be at least six characters long and consist of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers and special characters (7-bit ASCII). Umlauts or accented characters are not allowed. Passwords you enter are checked for weakness. When entering a password that is easy to guess (such as a dictionary word or a name) you will see a warning. It is a good security practice to use strong passwords.

Important
Important: User Name and Password

Remember both your user name and the password because they are needed each time you log in to the system.

If you install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on a machine with one or more existing Linux installations, YaST allows you to import user data such as user names and passwords. Select Import User Data from a Previous Installation and then Choose Users for import.

If you do not want to configure any local users (for example when setting up a client on a network with centralized user authentication), skip this step by choosing Next and confirming the warning. Network user authentication can be configured at any time later in the installed system; refer to Chapter 24, Managing Users with YaST for instructions.

Two additional options are available:

Use this Password for System Administrator

If checked, the same password you have entered for the user will be used for the system administrator root. This option is suitable for stand-alone workstations or machines in a home network that are administrated by a single user. When not checked, you are prompted for a system administrator password in the next step of the installation workflow (see Section 8.14, “Authentication for the System Administrator root).

Automatic Login

This option automatically logs the current user in to the system when it starts. This is mainly useful if the computer is operated by only one user. For automatic login to work, the option must be explicitly enabled.

Warning
Warning: Automatic Login

With the automatic login enabled, the system boots straight into your desktop with no authentication. If you store sensitive data on your system, you should not enable this option if the computer can also be accessed by others.

In an environment where users are centrally managed (for example by NIS or LDAP) you should skip the creation of local users. Select Skip User Creation in this case.

8.14 Authentication for the System Administrator root

If you have not chosen Use this Password for System Administrator in the previous step, you will be prompted to enter a password for the System Administrator root or provide a public SSH key. Otherwise this configuration step is skipped.

Authentication for the System Administrator root
Figure 8.14: Authentication for the System Administrator root

root is the name of the superuser, or the administrator of the system. Unlike regular users, root has unlimited rights to change the system configuration, install programs, and set up new hardware. If users forget their passwords or have other problems with the system, root can help. The root account should only be used for system administration, maintenance, and repair. Logging in as root for daily work is rather risky: a single mistake could lead to irretrievable loss of system files.

For verification purposes, the password for root must be entered twice. Do not forget the root password. After having been entered, this password cannot be retrieved.

Tip
Tip: Passwords and Keyboard Layout

It is recommended to only use US ASCII characters. In case of a system error or when you need to start your system in rescue mode, the keyboard may not be localized.

The root password can be changed any time later in the installed system. To do so run YaST and start Security and Users › User and Group Management.

Important
Important: The root User

The user root has all the permissions needed to make changes to the system. To carry out such tasks, the root password is required. You cannot carry out any administrative tasks without this password.

In some situations it is preferred to access the system remotely via SSH using a public key. This screen allows you to select a public key from a medium.

The following procedure describes how to add a public SSH key from a USB stick. It works the same way with CD/DVD-ROM or from an existing partition. Proceed as follows:

Procedure 8.1: Adding a Public SSH Key for User root
  1. Insert into your computer the USB storage device containing the public SSH key. The public SSH key has the file extension .pub.

  2. Click Refresh. You should see the device in the list selector under Import Public Key.

  3. Click Browse and select the public SSH key.

  4. Proceed with Next.

Do not forget to open the SSH port in the Security section of the Installation Settings summary. After the installation is finished, you can log in through SSH using the provided public SSH key.

8.15 Installation Settings

On the last step before the real installation takes place, you can alter installation settings suggested by the installer. To modify the suggestions, click the respective headline. After having made changes to a particular setting, you are always returned to the Installation Settings window, which is updated accordingly.

If you have added an SSH key for your root as mentioned in Procedure 8.1, make sure to open the SSH port in the Security settings.

Installation Settings
Figure 8.15: Installation Settings

8.15.1 Software

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server contains several software patterns for various application purposes. The available choice of patterns and packages depends on your selection of modules and extensions.

Click Software to open the Software Selection and System Tasks screen where you can modify the pattern selection according to your needs. Select a pattern from the list and see a description in the right-hand part of the window.

Each pattern contains several software packages needed for specific functions (for example Web and LAMP server or a print server). For a more detailed selection based on software packages to install, select Details to switch to the YaST Software Manager.

Software Selection and System Tasks
Figure 8.16: Software Selection and System Tasks

You can also install additional software packages or remove software packages from your system at any later time with the YaST Software Manager. For more information, refer to Chapter 21, Installing or Removing Software.

If you choose to install GNOME, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is installed with the X.org display server. As an alternative to GNOME, the lightweight window manager IceWM can be installed. Select Details from the Software Selection and System Tasks screen and search for icewm.

Tip
Tip: IBM Z: Hardware Cryptography Support

The hardware cryptography stack is not installed by default. To install it, select System z HW crypto support in the Software Selection and System Tasks screen.

Tip
Tip: Adding Secondary Languages

The language you selected with the first step of the installation will be used as the primary (default) language for the system. You can add secondary languages from within the Software dialog by choosing Details › View › Languages.

8.15.2 Booting

The installer proposes a boot configuration for your system. Other operating systems found on your computer, such as Microsoft Windows or other Linux installations, will automatically be detected and added to the boot loader. However, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server will be booted by default. Normally, you can leave these settings unchanged. If you need a custom setup, modify the proposal according to your needs. For information, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 14 “The Boot Loader GRUB 2”, Section 14.3 “Configuring the Boot Loader with YaST”.

Important
Important: Software RAID 1

Booting a configuration where /boot resides on a software RAID 1 device is supported, but it requires to install the boot loader into the MBR (Boot Loader Location › Boot from Master Boot Record). Having /boot on software RAID devices with a level other than RAID 1 is not supported. Also see Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 8 “Configuring Software RAID for the Root Partition”.

8.15.3 Security

The CPU Mitigations refer to kernel boot command line parameters for software mitigations that have been deployed to prevent CPU side-channel attacks. Click the selected entry to choose a different option. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 14 “The Boot Loader GRUB 2” CPU Mitigations.

By default firewalld is enabled on all configured network interfaces. To globally disable the firewall for this computer, click Disable (not recommended).

Note
Note: Firewall Settings

If the firewall is activated, all interfaces are configured to be in the public zone, where all ports are closed by default, ensuring maximum security. The only port you can open during the installation is port 22 (SSH), to allow remote access. All other services requiring network access (such as FTP, Samba, Web server, etc.) will only work after having adjusted the firewall settings. Refer to Book “Security and Hardening Guide”, Chapter 23 “Masquerading and Firewalls” for more information.

To enable remote access via the secure shell (SSH), make sure the SSH service is enabled and the SSH port is open.

Tip
Tip: Existing SSH Host Keys

If you install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server on a machine with existing Linux installations, the installation routine imports an SSH host key. It chooses the host key with the most recent access time by default. See also Section 8.15.8, “Import SSH Host Keys and Configuration.

If you are performing a remote administration over VNC, you can also specify whether the machine should be accessible via VNC after the installation. Note that enabling VNC also requires you to set the Default systemd Target to graphical.

8.15.4 Network Configuration

This category displays the current network settings, as automatically configured after booting into the installation (see Section 8.6) or as manually configured from the Registration or Add-On Product dialog during the respective steps of the installation process. If you want to check or adjust the network settings at this stage (before performing the installation), click Network Configuration. This takes you to the YaST Network Settings module. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 19 “Basic Networking”, Section 19.4 “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST”.

8.15.5 Kdump

Using Kdump, you can save a dump of the kernel (in case of a crash) to analyze what went wrong. Use this dialog to enable and configure Kdump. Find detailed information at Book “System Analysis and Tuning Guide”, Chapter 18 “Kexec and Kdump”.

8.15.6 IBM Z: Blacklist Devices

To save memory, all channels for devices currently not in use are blacklisted by default (each channel that is not blacklisted occupies approximately 50 KB of memory). To configure additional hardware in the installed system using channels that are currently blacklisted, run the respective YaST module to enable the respective channels first.

To disable blacklisting, click disable.

8.15.7 Default systemd Target

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server can boot into two different targets (formerly known as runlevels). The graphical target starts a display manager, whereas the multi-user target starts the command line interface.

The default target is graphical. In case you have not installed the X Window System patterns, you need to change it to multi-user. If the system should be accessible via VNC, you need to choose graphical.

8.15.8 Import SSH Host Keys and Configuration

If an existing Linux installation on your computer was detected, YaST will import the most recent SSH host key found in /etc/ssh by default, optionally including other files in the directory as well. This makes it possible to reuse the SSH identity of the existing installation, avoiding the REMOTE HOST IDENTIFICATION HAS CHANGED warning on the first connection. Note that this item is not shown in the installation summary if YaST has not discovered any other installations. You have the following choices:

I would like to import SSH keys from a previous install:

Select this option to import the SSH host key and optionally the configuration of an installed system. You can select the installation to import from in the option list below.

Import SSH Configuration

Enable this to copy other files in /etc/ssh to the installed system in addition to the host keys.

8.15.9 System

This screen lists all the hardware information the installer could obtain about your computer. When opened for the first time, the hardware detection is started. Depending on your system, this may take some time. Select any item in the list and click Details to see detailed information about the selected item. Use Save to File to save a detailed list to either the local file system or a removable device.

Advanced users can also change the PCI ID Setup and kernel settings by choosing Kernel Settings. A screen with two tabs opens:

PCI ID Setup

Each kernel driver contains a list of device IDs of all devices it supports. If a new device is not in any driver's database, the device is treated as unsupported, even if it can be used with an existing driver. You can add PCI IDs to a device driver here. Only advanced users should attempt to do so.

To add an ID, click Add and select whether to Manually enter the data, or whether to choose from a list. Enter the required data. The SysFS Dir is the directory name from /sys/bus/pci/drivers—if empty, the driver name is used as the directory name. Existing entries can be managed with Edit and Delete.

Kernel Settings

Change the Global I/O Scheduler here. If Not Configured is chosen, the default setting for the respective architecture will be used. This setting can also be changed at any time later from the installed system. Refer to Book “System Analysis and Tuning Guide”, Chapter 13 “Tuning I/O Performance” for details on I/O tuning.

Also activate the Enable SysRq Keys here. These keys will let you issue basic commands (such as rebooting the system or writing kernel dumps) in case the system crashes. Enabling these keys is recommended when doing kernel development. Refer to https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/admin-guide/sysrq.html for details.

8.16 Performing the Installation

After configuring all installation settings, click Install in the Installation Settings window to start the installation. Some software may require a license confirmation. If your software selection includes such software, license confirmation dialogs are displayed. Click Accept to install the software package. When not agreeing to the license, click I Disagree and the software package will not be installed. In the dialog that follows, confirm with Install again.

The installation usually takes between 15 and 30 minutes, depending on the system performance and the selected software scope. After having prepared the hard disk and having saved and restored the user settings, the software installation starts. Choose Details to switch to the installation log or Release Notes to read important up-to-date information that was not available when the manuals were printed.

After the software installation has completed, the system reboots into the new installation where you can log in. To customize the system configuration or to install additional software packages, start YaST.

8.16.1 IBM Z: IPLing the Installed System

YaST usually reboots into the installed system on the IBM Z platform. Exceptions are installations where the boot loader resides on an FCP device in environments with LPAR on a machine older than z196 or with z/VM older than release 5.4. The boot loader gets written to a separate partition mounted as /boot/zipl/.

In cases where an automatic reboot is not possible, YaST will show a dialog containing information about from which device to do an IPL. Accept the shutdown option and perform an IPL after the shutdown. The procedure varies according to the type of installation:

LPAR Installation

In the IBM Z HMC, select Load, select Clear, then enter the loading address (the address of the device containing the /boot/zipl directory with the boot loader). If using a zFCP disk as the boot device, choose Load from SCSI and specify the load address of your FCP adapter plus WWPN and LUN of the boot device. Now start the loading process.

z/VM Installation

Log in to the VM guest (see Example 5.1, “Configuration of a z/VM Directory” for the configuration) as LINUX1 and proceed to IPL the installed system:

IPL 151 CLEAR

151 is an example address of the DASD boot device, replace this value with the correct address.

If using a zFCP disk as the boot device, specify both the zFCP WWPN and LUN of the boot device before initiating the IPL. The parameter length is limited to eight characters. Longer numbers must be separated by spaces:

SET LOADDEV PORT 50050763 00C590A9 LUN 50010000 00000000

Finally, initiate the IPL:

IPL FC00

FC00 is an example address of the zFCP adapter, replace this value with the correct address.

KVM Guest Installation

After the installation has finished, the virtual machine is shut down. At this point, log in to the KVM host, edit the virtual machine's description file and restart it to IPL into the installed system:

  1. Log in to the KVM host.

  2. Edit the domain XML file by running

    > sudo virsh edit s12-1

    and remove the following lines:

      <!-- Boot kernel - remove 3 lines after successfull installation -->
      <kernel>/var/lib/libvirt/images/s12-kernel.boot</kernel>
      <initrd>/var/lib/libvirt/images/s12-initrd.boot</initrd>
      <cmdline>linuxrcstderr=/dev/console</cmdline>
  3. Restart the VM Guest to IPL into the installed system:

    > sudo virsh start s12-1 --console
Note
Note: cio_ignore Is Disabled for KVM Installations

The kernel parameter cio_ignore prevents the kernel from looking at all the available hardware devices. However, for KVM guests, the hypervisor already takes care to only provide access to the correct devices. Therefore cio_ignore is disabled by default when installing a KVM guest (for z/VM and LPAR installations it is activated by default).

8.16.2 IBM Z: Connecting to the Installed System

After IPLing the system, establish a connection via VNC, SSH, or X to log in to the installed system. Using either VNC or SSH is recommended. To customize the system configuration or to install additional software packages, start YaST.

8.16.2.1 Using VNC to Connect

A message in the 3270 terminal asks you to connect to the Linux system using a VNC client. However, this message is easily missed, because it is mixed with kernel messages and the terminal process might quit before you notice the message. If nothing happens for five minutes, try to initiate a connection to the Linux system using a VNC viewer.

If you connect using a JavaScript-capable browser, enter the complete URL, consisting of the IP address of the installed system along with the port number, in the following fashion:

http://IP_OF_INSTALLED_SYSTEM:5801/

8.16.2.2 Using SSH to Connect

A message in the 3270 terminal asks you to connect to the Linux system with an SSH client. This message is easily missed, however, because it is mixed with kernel messages and the terminal process might quit before you become aware of the message.

When the message appears, use SSH to log in to the Linux system as root. If the connection is denied or times out, wait for the login timeout to expire, then try again (this time depends on server settings).

8.16.2.3 Using X to Connect

When IPLing the installed system, make sure that the X server used for the first phase of the installation is up and still available before booting from the DASD. YaST opens on this X server to finish the installation. Complications may arise if the system is booted up but unable to connect to the X server in a timely fashion.

9 Registering SUSE Linux Enterprise and Managing Modules/Extensions

To get technical support and product updates, you need to register and activate SUSE Linux Enterprise Server with the SUSE Customer Center. It is recommended to register during the installation, since this will enable you to install the system with the latest updates and patches available. However, if you are offline or want to skip the registration step, you can register at any time later from the installed system.

Modules and extensions add features to your system and allow you to customize the system according to your needs. These components also need to be registered and can be managed with YaST or command line tools. For more details also refer to the Article “Modules and Extensions Quick Start”.

Note
Note: SUSE Account

Registering with the SUSE Customer Center requires a SUSE account. In case you do not have a SUSE account yet, go to the SUSE Customer Center home page (https://scc.suse.com/) to create one.

Tip
Tip: Deregistering a System

To completely deregister a system including all modules and extensions use the command line tool SUSEConnect. Deregistering a system removes its entry on the registration server and removes all repositories for modules, extensions, and the product itself.

> sudo SUSEConnect -d

9.1 Registering During the Installation

The easiest and recommended way to register is to do it during the installation. It will not only allow you to install the latest patch level of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, but you will also get access to all modules and extensions without having to provide an additional installation media. This also applies to all modules or extension you install. For details on the registration process refer to Section 8.7, “Registration”.

If the system was successfully registered during installation, YaST will add online repositories provided by SUSE Customer Center. This prevents problems if local installation sources are no longer available and ensures that you always get the latest updates from the online repositories.

9.2 Registering during Automated Deployment

If you deploy your instances automatically using AutoYaST, you can register the system during the installation by providing the respective information in the AutoYaST control file. Refer to Book “AutoYaST Guide”, Chapter 4 “Configuration and Installation Options”, Section 4.3 “System Registration and Extension Selection” for details.

9.3 Registering from the Installed System

If you have skipped the registration during the installation or want to re-register your system, you can do so at any time using the YaST module Product Registration or the command line tool SUSEConnect.

9.3.1 Registering with YaST

To register the system start YaST › Software › Product Registration. First register SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, then choose the modules and extensions you want to make available.

Important
Important: Modules and Extensions

If you have installed the system by skipping the registration and installing from the SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso media, make sure to register all the modules and extension you have chosen during the installation. You will only receive security updates and patches for modules and extensions that have been registered.

Procedure 9.1: Product Registration with YaST
  1. Start YaST › Software › Product Registration.

    Product Registration with YaST
  2. Provide the E-mail address associated with the SUSE account you or your organization uses to manage subscriptions. Also enter the Registration Code you received with your copy of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

  3. By default the system is registered with the SUSE Customer Center. Proceed to the next step to make this happen.

    If your organization provides local registration servers you can either choose one form the list of auto-detected servers or provide the URL at Register System via local RMT Server.

  4. Choose Next to start the registration process. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is registered with the chosen server and the associated repositories are added to your system. The Extension and Module Selection dialog opens.

    Extension and Module Selection dialog
  5. Select all modules and extensions you want to make available in the system. You should at least choose the preselected modules (Basesystem Module and Server Applications Module). Also make sure to choose any additional module or extension that you have added during the installation. Note that all extensions require additional registration codes which are liable for cost. Proceed with Next.

  6. Depending on your selection, you may need to accept one or more license agreements now. All components are registered with the chosen server and the associated repositories are added to your system.

  7. The YaST package installer opens to install release-packages for each module and, depending on your choice of modules and extensions, additional packages. It is strongly recommended not to deselect any of the preselected packages; you may, however, add additional packages.

    YaST package installer

    Choose Accept and Finish to conclude the registration process.

9.3.2 Registering with SUSEConnect

Registering the system plus modules and extensions is also possible from the command line using SUSEConnect. For information that go beyond the scope of this section, refer to the inline documentation with man 8 SUSEConnect

Procedure 9.2: Product Registration with SUSEConnect
  1. To register SUSE Linux Enterprise Server with SUSE Customer Center run SUSEConnect as follows:

    > sudo SUSEConnect -r REGISTRATION_CODE -e EMAIL_ADDRESS

    To register with a local registration server, additionally provide the URL to the server:

    > sudo SUSEConnect -r REGISTRATION_CODE -e EMAIL_ADDRESS \
    --url "https://suse_register.example.com/"

    Replace REGISTRATION_CODE with the registration code you received with your copy of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Replace EMAIL_ADDRESS with the E-mail address associated with the SUSE account you or your organization uses to manage subscriptions.

    This process will register the Basesystem Module and Server Applications Module and add the associated repositories to your system.

  2. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server including the two default repositories is now registered. In case you want to register additional modules or extensions, proceed as outlined in Section 9.4, “Managing Modules and Extensions in a Running System”.

9.4 Managing Modules and Extensions in a Running System

Even after a system is installed and registered, adding and removing modules and extensions is still possible. You can either use YaST or SUSEConnect for this task. For more details also refer to the Article “Modules and Extensions Quick Start”.

9.4.1 Adding Modules and Extensions with YaST

  1. Start YaST › Software › Add System Extensions or Modules.

    Add System Extensions or Modules
  2. To add modules or extensions, select all components you want to install. Note that all extensions require additional registration codes which are liable for cost.

  3. All additional components are registered with the registration server and the associated repositories are added to your system.

  4. The YaST package installer opens to install release-packages for each module and, depending on your choice of modules and extensions, additional packages. It is strongly recommended not to deselect any of the preselected packages; you may, however, add additional packages.

    Choose Accept and Finish to conclude the process.

Tip
Tip: Module Dependencies

Similar to software packages, which may depend on other packages to function, a module may have dependencies on other modules. If this is the case, the modules on which it depends are automatically selected for installation.

9.4.2 Deleting Modules and Extensions with YaST

  1. Start YaST › Software › Add-On Products.

    Add-On Products
  2. Choose the module or extension that should be removed and click Delete. Confirm the warning saying that all packages from the selected component will be removed.

  3. The YaST Software Manager opens and lists all installed packages from the deleted module or extension. Click Accept to remove all of them. It is strongly recommended to do so, because you will no longer get updates for packages from deleted modules or extensions. In case you keep packages, make sure to at least remove the *-release package for each module or extension that gets deleted.

    Proceed with Accept and then OK.

Warning
Warning: Deleting Modules

Note that you should never delete the Basesystem Module. It is also not recommended to delete the Server Applications Module.

Warning
Warning: No Updates for Packages from Deleted Modules and Extensions

If you choose to keep packages from deleted modules or extensions, you will no longer receive updates for these packages. Because this includes security fixes, keeping such packages may introduce a security risk to your system.

9.4.3 Adding/Deleting Modules and Extensions with SUSEConnect

  1. Run SUSEConnect -list-extensions to get an overview of available extensions:

    > sudo SUSEConnect -list-extensions
    AVAILABLE EXTENSIONS AND MODULES
    
      Basesystem Module 15 SP2 x86_64 (Installed)
      Deactivate with: SUSEConnect -d -p sle-module-basesystem/15.2/x86_64
    
        Containers Module 15 SP2 x86_64
        Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-containers/15.2/x86_64
    
        Desktop Applications Module 15 SP2 x86_64
        Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-desktop-applications/15.2/x86_64
    
          Development Tools Module 15 SP2 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-development-tools/15.2/x86_64
    
          SUSE Linux Enterprise Workstation Extension 15 SP2 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-we/15.2/x86_64 -r ADDITIONAL REGCODE
    
        SUSE Cloud Application Platform Tools Module 15 SP2 x86_64
        Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-cap-tools/15.2/x86_64
    
        SUSE Linux Enterprise Live Patching 15 SP2 x86_64
        Activate with:
          SUSEConnect -p sle-module-live-patching/15.2/x86_64 -r ADDITIONAL REGCODE
    
        SUSE Package Hub 15 SP2 x86_64
        Activate with: SUSEConnect -p PackageHub/15.2/x86_64
    
        Server Applications Module 15 SP2 x86_64 (Installed)
        Deactivate with: SUSEConnect -d -p sle-module-server-applications/15.2/x86_64
    
          Legacy Module 15 SP2 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-legacy/15.2/x86_64
    
          Public Cloud Module 15 SP2 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-public-cloud/15.2/x86_64
    
          SUSE Enterprise Storage 6 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p ses/6/x86_64 -r ADDITIONAL REGCODE
    
          SUSE Linux Enterprise High Availability Extension 15 SP2 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-ha/15.2/x86_64 -r ADDITIONAL REGCODE
    
          Web and Scripting Module 15 SP2 x86_64
          Activate with: SUSEConnect -p sle-module-web-scripting/15.2/x86_64
    
    MORE INFORMATION
    
    You can find more information about available modules here:
    https://www.suse.com/products/server/features/modules.html
  2. Run the commands in the listing for activating/deactivating a module or extension to add or delete a component. Note that adding an extensions requires additional registration codes which are liable for cost.

Warning
Warning: Deleting Modules

Note that you should never delete the Basesystem Module. It is also not recommended to delete the Server Applications Module.

Important
Important: No Automated Installation/Removal of Packages

When using SUSEConnect to add or delete modules and extensions, the components get de-registered and the respective repositories or services get removed from the system. No installation or removal of packages will be done. If you want this to be done automatically, use YaST to add or delete modules and extensions.

When adding a module or extension, this means no automatic installation of default packages or patterns is performed. You need to do this manually with Zypper on the command line or by running YaST › Software Management.

When deleting a module or extension, this means no automatic cleanup will be done. All packages that belonged to the module or extension will remain installed on the system, but are longer associated with a repository and therefore will no longer receive updates. To remove these so-called orphaned packages use Zypper on the command line. zypper packages --orphaned lists these packages and zypper remove deletes one or more packages. Alternatively use YaST › Software Management to list and delete orphaned packages.

Warning
Warning: No Updates for Packages from Deleted Modules and Extensions

If you choose to keep packages from deleted modules or extensions, you will no longer receive updates for these packages. Because this includes security fixes, keeping such packages may introduce a security risk to your system.

10 Expert Partitioner

Sophisticated system configurations require specific disk setups. You can perform all common partitioning tasks during the installation.

To get persistent device naming with block devices, use the block devices below /dev/disk/by-id or /dev/disk/by-uuid.

Logical Volume Management (LVM) is a disk partitioning scheme that is designed to be much more flexible than the physical partitioning used in standard setups. Its snapshot functionality enables easy creation of data backups. Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) offers increased data integrity, performance, and fault tolerance. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server also supports multipath I/O (see Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 18 “Managing Multipath I/O for Devices” for details). There is also the option to use iSCSI as a networked disk (read more about iSCSI in Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 15 “Mass Storage over IP Networks: iSCSI”).

Warning
Warning: Disk Space Units

Note that for partitioning purposes, disk space is measured in binary units, rather than in decimal units. For example, if you enter sizes of 1GB, 1GiB or 1G, they all signify 1 GiB (Gibibyte), as opposed to 1 GB (Gigabyte).

Binary

1 GiB = 1 073 741 824 bytes.

Decimal

1 GB = 1 000 000 000 bytes.

Difference

1 GiB ≈ 1.07 GB.

10.1 Using the Expert Partitioner

With the Expert Partitioner, shown in Figure 10.1, “The YaST Partitioner”, manually modify the partitioning of one or several hard disks. You can add, delete, resize, and edit partitions, or access the soft RAID, and LVM configuration.

Warning
Warning: Repartitioning the Running System

Although it is possible to repartition your system while it is running, the risk of making a mistake that causes data loss is very high. Try to avoid repartitioning your installed system and always create a complete backup of your data before attempting to do so.

The YaST Partitioner
Figure 10.1: The YaST Partitioner
Tip
Tip: IBM Z: Device Names

IBM Z recognizes only DASD, zFCP and SCSI hard disks. IDE hard disks are not supported. This is why these devices appear in the partition table as dasda or sda for the first recognized device.

All existing or suggested partitions on all connected hard disks are displayed in the list of Available Storage in the YaST Expert Partitioner dialog. Entire hard disks are listed as devices without numbers, such as /dev/sda (or /dev/dasda). Partitions are listed as parts of these devices, such as /dev/sda1 (or /dev/dasda1, respectively). The size, type, encryption status, file system, and mount point of the hard disks and their partitions are also displayed. The mount point describes where the partition appears in the Linux file system tree.

Several functional views are available on the left hand System View. These views can be used to collect information about existing storage configurations, configure functions (like RAID, Volume Management, Crypt Files), and view file systems with additional features, such as Btrfs, NFS, or TMPFS.

If you run the expert dialog during installation, any free hard disk space is also listed and automatically selected. To provide more disk space to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, free the needed space by going from the bottom toward the top in the list of partitions.

10.1.1 Partition Tables

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server allows to use and create different partition tables. In some cases the partition table is called disk label. The partition table is important to the boot process of your computer. To boot your machine from a partition in a newly created partition table, make sure that the table format is supported by the firmware.

To change the partition table, click the relevant disk name in the System View and choose Expert › Create New Partition Table.

10.1.1.1 Master Boot Record

The master boot record (MBR) is the legacy partition table used on IBM PCs. It is sometimes also called an MS-DOS partition table. The MBR only supports four primary partitions. If the disk already has an MBR, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server allows you to create additional partitions in it which can be used as the installation target.

The limit of four partitions can be overcome by creating an extended partition. The extended partition itself is a primary partition and can contain more logical partitions.

UEFI firmware usually supports booting from MBR in the legacy mode.

10.1.1.2 GPT Partition Table

UEFI computers use a GUID Partition Table (GPT) by default. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server will create a GPT on a disk if no other partition table exists.

Old BIOS firmware does not support booting from GPT partitions.

You need a GPT partition table to use one of the following features:

  • More than four primary partitions

  • UEFI Secure Boot

  • Use disks larger than 2 TB

Note
Note: Partitions Created with Parted 3.1 or Earlier Mislabeled

GPT partitions created with Parted 3.1 or earlier used the Microsoft Basic Data partition type instead of the newer Linux-specific GPT GUID. Newer versions of Parted will set the misleading flag msftdata on such partitions. This will also lead to various disk tools labeling the partition as a Windows Data Partition or similar.

To remove the flag, run:

# parted DEVICE set PARTITION_NUMBER msftdata off

10.1.1.3 Partition Tables on IBM Z

On IBM Z platforms, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server supports SCSI hard disks and direct access storage devices (DASD). While SCSI disks can be partitioned as described above, DASDs can have no more than three partition entries in their partition tables.

10.1.2 Partitions

The YaST Partitioner can create and format partitions with several file systems. The default file system used by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server is Btrfs. For details, see Section 10.1.2.2, “Btrfs Partitioning”.

Other commonly used file systems are available: Ext2, Ext3, Ext4, FAT, XFS, Swap, and UDF.

10.1.2.1 Creating a Partition

To create a partition select Hard Disks and then a hard disk with free space. The actual modification can be done in the Partitions tab:

  1. Click Add to create a new partition. When using MBR, specify to create a primary or extended partition. Within the extended partition, you can create several logical partitions. For details, see Section 10.1.1, “Partition Tables”.

  2. Specify the size of the new partition. You can either choose to occupy all the free unpartitioned space, or enter a custom size.

  3. Select the file system to use and a mount point. YaST suggests a mount point for each partition created. To use a different mount method, like mount by label, select Fstab Options.

  4. Specify additional file system options if your setup requires them. This is necessary, for example, if you need persistent device names. For details on the available options, refer to Section 10.1.3, “Editing a Partition”.

  5. Click Finish to apply your partitioning setup and leave the partitioning module.

    If you created the partition during installation, you are returned to the installation overview screen.

10.1.2.2 Btrfs Partitioning

The default file system for the root partition is Btrfs. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 7 “System Recovery and Snapshot Management with Snapper” and Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 1 “Overview of File Systems in Linux”. The root file system is the default subvolume and it is not listed in the list of created subvolumes. As a default Btrfs subvolume, it can be mounted as a normal file system.

Important
Important: Btrfs on an Encrypted Root Partition

The default partitioning setup suggests the root partition as Btrfs with /boot being a directory. To encrypt the root partition, make sure to use the GPT partition table type instead of the default MSDOS type. Otherwise the GRUB2 boot loader may not have enough space for the second stage loader.

It is possible to create snapshots of Btrfs subvolumes—either manually, or automatically based on system events. For example when making changes to the file system, zypper invokes the snapper command to create snapshots before and after the change. This is useful if you are not satisfied with the change zypper made and want to restore the previous state. As snapper invoked by zypper creates snapshots of the root file system by default, it makes sense to exclude specific directories from snapshots. This is the reason YaST suggests creating the following separate subvolumes:

/boot/grub2/i386-pc, /boot/grub2/x86_64-efi, /boot/grub2/powerpc-ieee1275, /boot/grub2/s390x-emu

A rollback of the boot loader configuration is not supported. The directories listed above are architecture-specific. The first two directories are present on AMD64/Intel 64 machines, the latter two on IBM POWER and on IBM Z, respectively.

/home

If /home does not reside on a separate partition, it is excluded to avoid data loss on rollbacks.

/opt

Third-party products usually get installed to /opt. It is excluded to avoid uninstalling these applications on rollbacks.

/srv

Contains data for Web and FTP servers. It is excluded to avoid data loss on rollbacks.

/tmp

All directories containing temporary files and caches are excluded from snapshots.

/usr/local

This directory is used when manually installing software. It is excluded to avoid uninstalling these installations on rollbacks.

/var

This directory contains many variable files, including logs, temporary caches, third party products in /var/opt, and is the default location for virtual machine images and databases. Therefore this subvolume is created to exclude all of this variable data from snapshots and has Copy-On-Write disabled.

Tip
Tip: Size of Btrfs Partition

Since saved snapshots require more disk space, it is recommended to reserve enough space for Btrfs. While the minimum size for a root Btrfs partition with snapshots and default subvolumes is 16 GB, SUSE recommends at least 32 GB, or more if /home does not reside on a separate partition.

10.1.2.3 Managing Btrfs Subvolumes using YaST

Subvolumes of a Btrfs partition can be now managed with the YaST Expert Partitioner module. You can add new or delete existing subvolumes.

Procedure 10.1: Btrfs Subvolumes with YaST
  1. Choose Btrfs in the left side pane.

  2. Select the Btrfs partition whose subvolumes you need to manage.

  3. Depending on whether you want to edit, add, or delete subvolumes, do the following:

    1. To edit a subvolume, select it from the list and click Edit. You can then disable copy-on-write (check noCoW) for the volume or limit it's size. Click Accept to finish.

    2. To add a new subvolume, click Add Subvolume, and enter it's path. Optionally, you can disable copy-on-write (check noCoW) for the volume or limit it's size. Click Accept to finish.

    3. To delete a subvolume, select it from the list and click Delete. Confirm the deletion by clicking Yes.

    4. Btrfs Subvolumes in YaST Partitioner
      Figure 10.2: Btrfs Subvolumes in YaST Partitioner
  4. Leave the partitioner with Finish.

10.1.3 Editing a Partition

When you create a new partition or modify an existing partition, you can set various parameters. For new partitions, the default parameters set by YaST are usually sufficient and do not require any modification. To edit your partition setup manually, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the partition.

  2. Click Edit to edit the partition and set the parameters:

    File System ID

    Even if you do not want to format the partition at this stage, assign it a file system ID to ensure that the partition is registered correctly. Typical values are Linux, Linux swap, Linux LVM, and Linux RAID.

    File System

    To change the partition file system, click Format Partition and select file system type in the File System list.

    SUSE Linux Enterprise Server supports several types of file systems. Btrfs is the Linux file system of choice for the root partition because of its advanced features. It supports copy-on-write functionality, creating snapshots, multi-device spanning, subvolumes, and other useful techniques. XFS, Ext3, and Ext4 are journaling file systems. These file systems can restore the system very quickly after a system crash, using write processes logged during the operation. Ext2 is not a journaling file system, but it is adequate for smaller partitions because it does not require much disk space for management.

    The default file system for the root partition is Btrfs. The default file system for additional partitions is XFS.

    The UDF file system can be used on optical rewritable and non-rewritable media, USB flash drives and hard disks. It is supported by multiple operating systems.

    Swap is a special format that allows the partition to be used as a virtual memory. Create a swap partition of at least 256 MB. However, if you use up your swap space, consider adding memory to your system instead of adding swap space.

    Warning
    Warning: Changing the File System

    Changing the file system and reformatting partitions irreversibly deletes all data from the partition.

    For details on the various file systems, refer to Storage Administration Guide.

    Encrypt Device

    If you activate the encryption, all data is written to the hard disk in encrypted form. This increases the security of sensitive data, but reduces the system speed, as the encryption takes some time to process. More information about the encryption of file systems is provided in Book “Security and Hardening Guide”, Chapter 12 “Encrypting Partitions and Files”.

    Mount Point

    Specify the directory where the partition should be mounted in the file system tree. Select from YaST suggestions or enter any other name.

    Fstab Options

    Specify various parameters contained in the global file system administration file (/etc/fstab). The default settings should suffice for most setups. You can, for example, change the file system identification from the device name to a volume label. In the volume label, use all characters except / and space.

    To get persistent devices names, use the mount option Device ID, UUID or LABEL. In SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, persistent device names are enabled by default.

    Note
    Note: IBM Z: Mounting by Path

    Since mounting by ID causes problems on IBM Z when using disk-to-disk copying for cloning purposes, devices are mounted by path in /etc/fstab on IBM Z by default.

    If you prefer to mount the partition by its label, you need to define one in the Volume label text entry. For example, you could use the partition label HOME for a partition intended to mount to /home.

    If you intend to use quotas on the file system, use the mount option Enable Quota Support. This must be done before you can define quotas for users in the YaST User Management module. For further information on how to configure user quota, refer to Section 24.3.3, “Managing Quotas”.

  3. Select Finish to save the changes.

Note
Note: Resize File Systems

To resize an existing file system, select the partition and use Resize. Note, that it is not possible to resize partitions while mounted. To resize partitions, unmount the relevant partition before running the partitioner.

10.1.4 Expert Options

After you select a hard disk device (like sda) in the System View pane, you can access the Expert menu in the lower right part of the Expert Partitioner window. The menu contains the following commands:

Create New Partition Table

This option helps you create a new partition table on the selected device.

Warning
Warning: Creating a New Partition Table

Creating a new partition table on a device irreversibly deletes all partitions and their data from that device.

Clone This Disk

This option helps you clone the device partition layout (but not the data) to other available disk devices.

10.1.5 Advanced Options

After you select the host name of the computer (the top-level of the tree in the System View pane), you can access the Configure menu in the lower right part of the Expert Partitioner window. The menu contains the following commands:

Configure iSCSI

To access SCSI over IP block devices, you first need to configure iSCSI. This results in additionally available devices in the main partition list.

Configure Multipath

Selecting this option helps you configure the multipath enhancement to the supported mass storage devices.

10.1.6 More Partitioning Tips

The following section includes a few hints and tips on partitioning that should help you make the right decisions when setting up your system.

10.1.6.1 Cylinder Numbers

Note, that different partitioning tools may start counting the cylinders of a partition with 0 or with 1. When calculating the number of cylinders, you should always use the difference between the last and the first cylinder number and add one.

10.1.6.2 Using swap

Swap is used to extend the available physical memory. It is then possible to use more memory than physical RAM available. The memory management system of kernels before 2.4.10 needed swap as a safety measure. Then, if you did not have twice the size of your RAM in swap, the performance of the system suffered. These limitations no longer exist.

Linux uses a page called Least Recently Used (LRU) to select pages that might be moved from memory to disk. Therefore, running applications have more memory available and caching works more smoothly.

If an application tries to allocate the maximum allowed memory, problems with swap can arise. There are three major scenarios to look at:

System with no swap

The application gets the maximum allowed memory. All caches are freed, and thus all other running applications are slowed. After a few minutes, the kernel's out-of-memory kill mechanism activates and kills the process.

System with medium sized swap (128 MB–512 MB)

At first, the system slows like a system without swap. After all physical RAM has been allocated, swap space is used as well. At this point, the system becomes very slow and it becomes impossible to run commands from remote. Depending on the speed of the hard disks that run the swap space, the system stays in this condition for about 10 to 15 minutes until the out-of-memory kill mechanism resolves the issue. Note that you will need a certain amount of swap if the computer needs to perform a suspend to disk. In that case, the swap size should be large enough to contain the necessary data from memory (512 MB–1GB).

System with lots of swap (several GB)

It is better to not have an application that is out of control and swapping excessively in this case. If you use such application, the system will need many hours to recover. In the process, it is likely that other processes get timeouts and faults, leaving the system in an undefined state, even after terminating the faulty process. In this case, do a hard machine reboot and try to get it running again. Lots of swap is only useful if you have an application that relies on this feature. Such applications (like databases or graphics manipulation programs) often have an option to directly use hard disk space for their needs. It is advisable to use this option instead of using lots of swap space.

If your system is not out of control, but needs more swap after some time, it is possible to extend the swap space online. If you prepared a partition for swap space, add this partition with YaST. If you do not have a partition available, you can also use a swap file to extend the swap. Swap files are generally slower than partitions, but compared to physical RAM, both are extremely slow so the actual difference is negligible.

Procedure 10.2: Adding a Swap File Manually

To add a swap file in the running system, proceed as follows:

  1. Create an empty file in your system. For example, to add a swap file with 128 MB swap at /var/lib/swap/swapfile, use the commands:

    > sudo mkdir -p /var/lib/swap
    > sudo dd if=/dev/zero of=/var/lib/swap/swapfile bs=1M count=128
  2. Initialize this swap file with the command

    > sudo mkswap /var/lib/swap/swapfile
    Note
    Note: Changed UUID for Swap Partitions When Formatting via mkswap

    Do not reformat existing swap partitions with mkswap if possible. Reformatting with mkswap will change the UUID value of the swap partition. Either reformat via YaST (which will update /etc/fstab) or adjust /etc/fstab manually.

  3. Activate the swap with the command

    > sudo swapon /var/lib/swap/swapfile

    To disable this swap file, use the command

    > sudo swapoff /var/lib/swap/swapfile
  4. Check the current available swap spaces with the command

    > cat /proc/swaps

    Note that at this point, it is only temporary swap space. After the next reboot, it is no longer used.

  5. To enable this swap file permanently, add the following line to /etc/fstab:

    /var/lib/swap/swapfile swap swap defaults 0 0

10.1.7 Partitioning and LVM

From the Expert Partitioner, access the LVM configuration by clicking the Volume Management item in the System View pane. However, if a working LVM configuration already exists on your system, it is automatically activated upon entering the initial LVM configuration of a session. In this case, all disks containing a partition (belonging to an activated volume group) cannot be repartitioned. The Linux kernel cannot reread the modified partition table of a hard disk when any partition on this disk is in use. If you already have a working LVM configuration on your system, physical repartitioning should not be necessary. Instead, change the configuration of the logical volumes.

At the beginning of the physical volumes (PVs), information about the volume is written to the partition. To reuse such a partition for other non-LVM purposes, it is advisable to delete the beginning of this volume. For example, in the VG system and PV /dev/sda2, do this with the command:

dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/sda2 bs=512 count=1
Warning
Warning: File System for Booting

The file system used for booting (the root file system or /boot) must not be stored on an LVM logical volume. Instead, store it on a normal physical partition.

For more details about LVM, see Book “Storage Administration Guide”.

10.2 LVM Configuration

This section explains specific steps to take when configuring LVM. If you need information about the Logical Volume Manager in general, refer to the Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 5 “LVM Configuration”, Section 5.1 “Understanding the Logical Volume Manager”.

Warning
Warning: Back up Your Data

Using LVM is sometimes associated with increased risk such as data loss. Risks also include application crashes, power failures, and faulty commands. Save your data before implementing LVM or reconfiguring volumes. Never work without a backup.

The YaST LVM configuration can be reached from the YaST Expert Partitioner (see Section 10.1, “Using the Expert Partitioner”) within the Volume Management item in the System View pane. The Expert Partitioner allows you to manage hard disks and partitions, as well as setting up RAID and LVM configurations.

10.2.1 Create Physical Volume

The first task is to create physical volumes that provide space to a volume group:

  1. Select a hard disk from Hard Disks.

  2. Change to the Partitions tab.

  3. Click Add and enter the desired size of the PV on this disk.

  4. Use Do not format partition and change the File System ID to 0x8E Linux LVM. Do not mount this partition.

  5. Repeat this procedure until you have defined all the desired physical volumes on the available disks.

10.2.2 Creating Volume Groups

If no volume group exists on your system, you must add one (see Figure 10.3, “Creating a Volume Group”). It is possible to create additional groups by clicking Volume Management in the System View pane, and then on Add Volume Group. One single volume group is usually sufficient.

  1. Enter a name for the VG, for example, system.

  2. Select the desired Physical Extend Size. This value defines the size of a physical block in the volume group. All the disk space in a volume group is handled in blocks of this size.

  3. Add the prepared PVs to the VG by selecting the device and clicking Add. Selecting several devices is possible by holding Ctrl while selecting the devices.

  4. Select Finish to make the VG available to further configuration steps.

Creating a Volume Group
Figure 10.3: Creating a Volume Group

If you have multiple volume groups defined and want to add or remove PVs, select the volume group in the Volume Management list and click Resize. In the following window, you can add PVs to or remove them from the selected volume group.

10.2.3 Configuring Logical Volumes

After the volume group has been filled with PVs, define the LVs which the operating system should use in the next dialog. Choose the current volume group and change to the Logical Volumes tab. Add, Edit, Resize, and Delete LVs as needed until all space in the volume group has been occupied. Assign at least one LV to each volume group.

Logical Volume Management
Figure 10.4: Logical Volume Management

Click Add and go through the wizard-like pop-up that opens:

  1. Enter the name of the LV. For a partition that should be mounted to /home, a name like HOME could be used.

  2. Select the type of the LV. It can be either Normal Volume, Thin Pool, or Thin Volume. Note that you need to create a thin pool first, which can store individual thin volumes. The big advantage of thin provisioning is that the total sum of all thin volumes stored in a thin pool can exceed the size of the pool itself.

  3. Select the size and the number of stripes of the LV. If you have only one PV, selecting more than one stripe is not useful.

  4. Choose the file system to use on the LV and the mount point.

By using stripes it is possible to distribute the data stream in the LV among several PVs (striping). However, striping a volume can only be done over different PVs, each providing at least the amount of space of the volume. The maximum number of stripes equals to the number of PVs, where Stripe "1" means "no striping". Striping only makes sense with PVs on different hard disks, otherwise performance will decrease.

Warning
Warning: Striping

YaST cannot, at this point, verify the correctness of your entries concerning striping. Any mistake made here is apparent only later when the LVM is implemented on disk.

If you have already configured LVM on your system, the existing logical volumes can also be used. Before continuing, assign appropriate mount points to these LVs. With Finish, return to the YaST Expert Partitioner and finish your work there.

10.3 Soft RAID

This section describes actions required to create and configure various types of RAID. In case you need background information about RAID, refer to Book “Storage Administration Guide”, Chapter 7 “Software RAID Configuration”, Section 7.1 “Understanding RAID Levels”.

10.3.1 Soft RAID Configuration

The YaST RAID configuration can be reached from the YaST Expert Partitioner, described in Section 10.1, “Using the Expert Partitioner”. This partitioning tool enables you to edit and delete existing partitions and create new ones to be used with soft RAID:

  1. Select a hard disk from Hard Disks.

  2. Change to the Partitions tab.

  3. Click Add and enter the desired size of the raid partition on this disk.

  4. Use Do not Format the Partition and change the File System ID to 0xFD Linux RAID. Do not mount this partition.

  5. Repeat this procedure until you have defined all the desired physical volumes on the available disks.

For RAID 0 and RAID 1, at least two partitions are needed—for RAID 1, usually exactly two and no more. If RAID 5 is used, at least three partitions are required, RAID 6 and RAID 10 require at least four partitions. It is recommended to use partitions of the same size only. The RAID partitions should be located on different hard disks to decrease the risk of losing data if one is defective (RAID 1 and 5) and to optimize the performance of RAID 0. After creating all the partitions to use with RAID, click RAID › Add RAID to start the RAID configuration.

In the next dialog, choose between RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6 and 10. Then, select all partitions with either the Linux RAID or Linux native type that should be used by the RAID system. No swap or DOS partitions are shown.

RAID Partitions
Figure 10.5: RAID Partitions

To add a previously unassigned partition to the selected RAID volume, first click the partition then Add. Assign all partitions reserved for RAID. Otherwise, the space on the partition remains unused. After assigning all partitions, click Next to select the available RAID Options.

In this last step, set the file system to use, encryption and the mount point for the RAID volume. After completing the configuration with Finish, see the /dev/md0 device and others indicated with RAID in the Expert Partitioner.

10.3.2 Troubleshooting

Check the file /proc/mdstat to find out whether a RAID partition has been damaged. If the system fails, shut down your Linux system and replace the defective hard disk with a new one partitioned the same way. Then restart your system and enter the command mdadm /dev/mdX --add /dev/sdX. Replace 'X' with your particular device identifiers. This integrates the hard disk automatically into the RAID system and fully reconstructs it.

Note that although you can access all data during the rebuild, you may encounter some performance issues until the RAID has been fully rebuilt.

10.3.3 For More Information

Configuration instructions and more details for soft RAID can be found at:

Linux RAID mailing lists are available, such as http://marc.info/?l=linux-raid.

11 Remote Installation

The installation of SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server can be fully performed over the network. This chapter describes how to provide the required environment for booting, installing and controlling the installation via the network.

11.1 Overview

For a remote installation you need to consider how to boot, how to control the installation, and the source of the installation data. All available options can be combined with each other, if they are available for your hardware platform.

Boot method

Depending on the hardware, several options for booting a system exist. Common options are DVD, USB drive or PXE boot. For more information about your platform, refer to Part I, “Installation Preparation”.

To set up a server for booting via PXE, refer to Chapter 17, Preparing Network Boot Environment.

Data source

Most commonly, DVDs or USB drives are used as a source for installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Alternatively, installation servers can be used. In this case, use the install boot parameter to specify the source. For details, refer to Section 7.3.3, “Specifying the Installation Source”.

To use a network source for the installation, prepare a server as described in Chapter 16, Setting Up a Network Installation Source.

Controlling the installation

Instead of using a keyboard and monitor directly attached to the target machine, the installation can be controlled via SSH, VNC, or by using the serial console of a machine. This is described in the sections Section 11.3, “Monitoring Installation via VNC”, Section 11.4, “Monitoring Installation via SSH” and Section 11.5, “Monitoring Installation via Serial Console”.

Instead of manually controlling the installation, AutoYaST can be used for fully automating the installation process. For details, refer to Book “AutoYaST Guide”.

11.2 Scenarios for Remote Installation

This section introduces the most common installation scenarios for remote installations. For each scenario, carefully check the list of prerequisites and follow the procedure outlined for that scenario. If in need of detailed instructions for a particular step, follow the links provided for each one of them.

11.2.1 Installation from Source Media via VNC

This type of installation still requires some degree of physical access to the target system to boot for installation. The installation is controlled by a remote workstation using VNC to connect to the installation program. User interaction is required as with the manual installation in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

For this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:

  • Target system with working network connection.

  • Controlling system with working network connection and VNC viewer software or JavaScript-enabled browser (Firefox, Chromium, Internet Explorer, Opera, etc.).

  • Installation DVD or USB flash drive.

To perform this kind of installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Boot the target system using the installation medium (USB flash drive) of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server media kit.

  2. When the boot screen of the target system appears, use the boot parameters prompt to set the VNC options and, if required, the static network configuration. For information about boot parameters, see Chapter 7, Boot Parameters.

    1. Boot parameters for a static network configuration:

      netdevice=NETDEVICE hostip=IP_ADDRESS netmask=NETMASK gateway=IP_GATEWAY vnc=1 VNCPassword=PASSWORD
    2. Boot parameters for a dynamic (DHCP) network configuration:

      vnc=1 VNCPassword=PASSWORD
  3. The target system boots to a text-based environment, giving the network address and display number under which the graphical installation environment can be addressed by any VNC viewer application or browser. VNC installations announce themselves over OpenSLP and if the firewall settings permit. They can be found using slptool as described in Section 11.3.1, “Preparing for VNC Installation”.

  4. On the controlling workstation, open a VNC viewing application or Web browser and connect to the target system as described in Section 11.3, “Monitoring Installation via VNC”.

  5. Perform the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

  6. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the initial system configuration. For details, see Part V, “Initial System Configuration”.

11.2.2 Installation from Network via VNC

This type of installation does not require a direct interaction with the target machine. The system is booted via PXE and the installation data is fetched from a server.

To perform this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:

  • At least one machine that can be used for installing a DHCP, NFS, HTTP, FTP, TFTP, or SMB server.

  • Target system capable of PXE boot, networking, and Wake on LAN, plugged in and connected to the network.

  • Controlling system with working network connection and VNC viewer software or JavaScript-enabled browser (Firefox, Chromium, Microsoft Edge, Opera, etc.).

To perform this type of installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Set up the server that contains the installation data. For details, see Part IV, “Setting Up an Installation Server”.

  2. Set up a DHCP and TFTP server for the network. This is described in Chapter 17, Preparing Network Boot Environment. Add the required boot parameters to enable the VNC server.

  3. Enable PXE boot in the target machine firmware. For more information, see Section 17.4, “Preparing the Target System for PXE Boot”.

  4. Initiate the boot process of the target system using Wake on LAN. This is described in Section 17.5, “Using Wake-on-LAN for Remote Wakeups”.

  5. On the controlling workstation, open a VNC viewing application or Web browser and connect to the target system as described in Section 11.3, “Monitoring Installation via VNC”.

  6. Perform the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

  7. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the initial system configuration. For details, see Part V, “Initial System Configuration”.

11.2.3 Installation from Source Media via SSH

This type of installation still requires some degree of physical access to the target system to boot for installation and to determine the IP address of the installation target. The installation itself is entirely controlled from a remote workstation using SSH to connect to the installer. User interaction is required as with the regular installation described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

For this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:

  • Target system with working network connection.

  • Controlling system with working network connection and working SSH client software.

  • Installation DVD or USB flash drive.

To perform this kind of installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Set up the installation target and installation server as described in Part IV, “Setting Up an Installation Server”.

  2. Boot the target system using the installation medium (USB flash drive) of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server media kit.

  3. When the boot screen of the target system appears, use the boot parameters prompt to set the SSH options and, if required, the static network configuration. For information about boot parameters, see Chapter 7, Boot Parameters.

    1. Boot parameters for a static network configuration:

      netdevice=NETDEVICE hostip=IP_ADDRESS netmask=NETMASK gateway=IP_GATEWAY ssh=1 ssh.password=PASSWORD
    2. Boot parameters for a dynamic (DHCP) network configuration:

      ssh=1 ssh.password=PASSWORD
  4. The target system boots to a text-based environment, giving the network address under which the graphical installation environment can be addressed by any SSH client.

  5. On the controlling workstation, open a terminal window and connect to the target system as described in Section 11.4.2, “Connecting to the Installation Program”.

  6. Perform the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

  7. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the initial system configuration. For details, see Part V, “Initial System Configuration”.

11.2.4 Installation from Network via SSH

This type of installation does not require a direct interaction with the target machine. The system is booted via PXE and the installation data is fetched from a server.

To perform this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:

  • At least one machine that can be used for installing a DHCP, NFS, HTTP, FTP, TFTP, or SMB server.

  • Target system capable of PXE boot, networking, and Wake on LAN, plugged in and connected to the network.

  • Controlling system with working network connection and SSH viewer software.

To perform this type of installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Set up the server that contains the installation data. For details, see Part IV, “Setting Up an Installation Server”.

  2. Set up a DHCP and TFTP server for the network. This is described in Chapter 17, Preparing Network Boot Environment. Add the required boot parameters to enable the SSH server.

  3. Enable PXE boot in the target machine firmware. For more information, see Section 17.4, “Preparing the Target System for PXE Boot”.

  4. Initiate the boot process of the target system using Wake on LAN. This is described in Section 17.5, “Using Wake-on-LAN for Remote Wakeups”.

  5. On the controlling workstation, open an SSH client software and connect to the target system as described in Section 11.4, “Monitoring Installation via SSH”.

  6. Perform the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

  7. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the initial system configuration. For details, see Part V, “Initial System Configuration”.

11.3 Monitoring Installation via VNC

Using any VNC viewer software, you can remotely control the installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server from virtually any operating system. This section introduces the setup using a VNC viewer application or a Web browser.

11.3.1 Preparing for VNC Installation

To enable VNC on the installation target, specify the appropriate boot parameters at the initial boot for installation (see Chapter 7, Boot Parameters). The target system boots into a text-based environment and waits for a VNC client to connect to the installation program.

The installation program announces the IP address and display number needed to connect for installation. If you have physical access to the target system, this information is provided right after the system booted for installation. Enter this data when your VNC client software prompts for it and provide your VNC password.

Because the installation target announces itself via OpenSLP, you can retrieve the address information of the installation target via an SLP browser. There is no need for any physical contact with the installation target itself, provided your network setup and all machines support OpenSLP:

Procedure 11.1: Locating VNC installations via OpenSLP
  1. Run slptool findsrvtypes | grep vnc to get a list of all services offering VNC. The VNC installation targets should be available under a service named YaST.installation.suse.

  2. Run slptool findsrvs YaST.installation.suse to get a list of installations available. Use the IP address and the port (usually 5901) provided with your VNC viewer.

11.3.2 Connecting to the Installation Program

There are two ways to connect to a VNC server (the installation target in this case). You can either start an independent VNC viewer application on any operating system or connect using a JavaScript-enabled Web browser.

Using VNC, you can control the installation of a Linux system from any other operating system, including other Linux flavors, Windows, or macOS.

On a Linux machine, make sure that the package tightvnc is installed. On a Windows machine, install the Windows port of this application, which can be obtained at the TightVNC home page (http://www.tightvnc.com/download.html).

To connect to the installation program running on the target machine, proceed as follows:

  1. Start the VNC viewer.

  2. Enter the IP address and display number of the installation target as provided by the SLP browser or the installation program itself:

    IP_ADDRESS:DISPLAY_NUMBER

    A window opens on your desktop displaying the YaST screens as in a normal local installation.

Using a Web browser to connect to the installation program makes you totally independent of any VNC software or the underlying operating system. As long as the browser application has JavaScript support enabled, you can use any browser (Firefox, Internet Explorer, Chromium, Opera, etc.) to perform the installation of your Linux system.

Note that the browser VNC connection is not encrypted.

To perform a VNC installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Launch your preferred Web browser.

  2. Enter the following at the address prompt:

    http://IP_ADDRESS_OF_TARGET:5801
  3. Enter your VNC password when prompted to do so. The browser window now displays the YaST screens as in a normal local installation.

11.4 Monitoring Installation via SSH

Using SSH, you can remotely control the installation of your Linux machine using any SSH client software.

11.4.1 Preparing for SSH Installation

In addition to installing the required software package (OpenSSH for Linux and PuTTY for Windows), you need to specify the appropriate boot parameters to enable SSH for installation. See Chapter 7, Boot Parameters for details. OpenSSH is installed by default on any SUSE Linux–based operating system.

11.4.2 Connecting to the Installation Program

After you have started the SSH installation, use this procedure to connect to the SSH session.

  1. Retrieve the installation target's IP address. If you have physical access to the target machine, take the IP address the installation routine provides in the console after the initial boot. Otherwise take the IP address that has been assigned to this particular host in the DHCP server configuration.

  2. In a command line, enter the following command:

    ssh -X root@TARGET_IP_ADDRESS

    Replace TARGET_IP_ADDRESS with the actual IP address of the installation target.

  3. When prompted for a user name, enter root.

  4. When prompted for the password, enter the password that has been set with the SSH boot parameter. After you have successfully authenticated, a command line prompt for the installation target appears.

  5. Enter yast to launch the installation program. A window opens showing the normal YaST screens as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

11.5 Monitoring Installation via Serial Console

For this installation method, you need a second computer connected by a null modem cable to the computer on which to install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Hardware and firmware of both machines need to support the serial console. Some firmware implementations are already configured to send the boot console output to a serial console (by providing a device tree with /chosen/stdout-path set appropriately). In this case no additional configuration is required.

If the firmware does not use the serial console for the boot console output, set the following boot parameter for the installation: console=TTY,BAUDRATE. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 14 “The Boot Loader GRUB 2”, Section 14.2.5 “Editing menu entries during the boot procedure” and Chapter 7, Boot Parameters.

BAUDRATE needs to be replaced by the baud rate for the interface. Valid values are 115200, 38400, or 9600. TTY needs to be replaced by the name of the interface. On most computers, there is one or more serial interfaces. Depending on the hardware, the names of the interfaces may vary:

  • ttyS0 for APM

  • ttyAMA0 for Server Base System Architecture (SBSA)

  • ttyPS0 for Xilinx

For the installation, you need a terminal program like minicom or screen. To initiate the serial connection, launch the screen program in a local console by entering the following command:

> screen /dev/ttyUSB0 115200

This means that screen listens to the first serial port with a baud rate of 115200. From this point on, the installation proceeds similarly to the text-based installation over this terminal.

12 Troubleshooting

This section highlights some typical problems you may run into during installation and offers possible solutions or workarounds.

12.1 Checking Media

If you encounter any problems using the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation media, check the integrity of your installation media. Boot from the media and chooseMore › Check Installation Media from the boot menu. A minimal system boots and lets you choose which device to check. Select the respective device and confirm with OK to perform the check.

In a running system, start YaST and choose Software › Media Check. Insert the medium and click Start Check. Checking may take several minutes.

If errors are detected during the check, do not use this medium for installation. Media problems may, for example, occur when having burned the medium on DVD yourself. Burning the media at a low speed (4x) helps to avoid problems.

12.2 No Bootable Drive Available

If your computer cannot boot from USB or DVD drive, there are several alternatives. This is also an option if your drive is not supported by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

Using an External USB Flash Drive or DVD Drive

Linux supports most existing USB flash drives and DVD drives. If the system has no USB flash drive or DVD drive, it is still possible that an external drive, connected through USB, FireWire, or SCSI, can be used to boot the system. Sometimes a firmware update may help if you encounter problems.

Network Boot via PXE

If a machine lacks both a USB flash drive and DVD drive, but provides a working Ethernet connection, perform a completely network-based installation. See Section 11.2.2, “Installation from Network via VNC” and Section 11.2.4, “Installation from Network via SSH” for details.

USB Flash Drive

You can use a USB flash drive if your machine lacks a DVD drive and network connection. For details, see:

12.3 Booting from Installation Media Fails

One reason a machine does not boot the installation media can be an incorrect boot sequence setting in BIOS. The BIOS boot sequence must have USB flash drive or DVD drive set as the first entry for booting. Otherwise the machine would try to boot from another medium, typically the hard disk. Guidance for changing the firmware boot sequence can be found in the documentation provided with your mainboard, or in the following paragraphs.

The BIOS is the software that enables the very basic functions of a computer. Motherboard vendors provide a BIOS specifically made for their hardware. Normally, the BIOS setup can only be accessed at a specific time—when the machine is booting. During this initialization phase, the machine performs several diagnostic hardware tests. One of them is a memory check, indicated by a memory counter. When the counter appears, look for a line, usually below the counter or somewhere at the bottom, mentioning the key to press to access the BIOS setup. Usually the key to press is one of Del, F1, or Esc. Press this key until the BIOS setup screen appears.

Procedure 12.1: Changing the BIOS Boot Sequence
  1. Enter the BIOS using the proper key as announced by the boot routines and wait for the BIOS screen to appear.

  2. To change the boot sequence in an AWARD BIOS, look for the BIOS FEATURES SETUP entry. Other manufacturers may have a different name for this, such as ADVANCED CMOS SETUP. When you have found the entry, select it and confirm with Enter.

  3. In the screen that opens, look for a subentry called BOOT SEQUENCE or BOOT ORDER. Change the settings by pressing Page ↑ or Page ↓ until the USB flash drive or DVD drive is listed first.

  4. Leave the BIOS setup screen by pressing Esc. To save the changes, select SAVE & EXIT SETUP, or press F10. To confirm that your settings should be saved, press Y.

Procedure 12.2: Changing the Boot Sequence in an SCSI BIOS (Adaptec Host Adapter)
  1. Open the setup by pressing CtrlA.

  2. Select Disk Utilities. The connected hardware components are now displayed.

    Make note of the SCSI ID of your USB flash drive or DVD drive.

  3. Exit the menu with Esc.

  4. Open Configure Adapter Settings. Under Additional Options, select Boot Device Options and press Enter.

  5. Enter the ID of the USB flash drive or DVD drive and press Enter again.

  6. Press Esc twice to return to the start screen of the SCSI BIOS.

  7. Exit this screen and confirm with Yes to boot the computer.

Regardless of what language and keyboard layout your final installation will be using, most BIOS configurations use the US keyboard layout as shown in the following figure:

US Keyboard Layout
Figure 12.1: US Keyboard Layout

12.4 Boot Failure

Some hardware types, mainly very old or very recent ones, fail to boot. Reasons can be missing support for hardware in the installation kernel or drivers causing problems on some specific hardware.

If your system fails to install using the standard Installation mode from the first installation boot screen, try the following:

  1. With the installation media still in the drive, reboot the machine with CtrlAltDel or using the hardware reset button.

  2. When the boot screen appears, press F5, use the arrow keys of your keyboard to navigate to No ACPI and press Enter to launch the boot and installation process. This option disables the support for ACPI power management techniques.

  3. Proceed with the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

If this fails, proceed as above, but choose Safe Settings instead. This option disables ACPI and DMA support. Most hardware will boot with this option.

If both of these options fail, use the boot parameters prompt to pass any additional parameters needed to support this type of hardware to the installation kernel. For more information about the parameters available as boot parameters, refer to the kernel documentation located in /usr/src/linux/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt.

Tip
Tip: Obtaining Kernel Documentation

Install the kernel-source package to view the kernel documentation.

There are other ACPI-related kernel parameters that can be entered at the boot prompt prior to booting for installation:

acpi=off

This parameter disables the complete ACPI subsystem on your computer. This may be useful if your computer cannot handle ACPI or if you think ACPI in your computer causes trouble.

acpi=force

Always enable ACPI even if your computer has an old BIOS dated before the year 2000. This parameter also enables ACPI if it is set in addition to acpi=off.

acpi=noirq

Do not use ACPI for IRQ routing.

acpi=ht

Run only enough ACPI to enable hyper-threading.

acpi=strict

Be less tolerant of platforms that are not strictly ACPI specification compliant.

pci=noacpi

Disable PCI IRQ routing of the new ACPI system.

pnpacpi=off

This option is for serial or parallel problems when your BIOS setup contains wrong interrupts or ports.

notsc

Disable the time stamp counter. This option can be used to work around timing problems on your systems. It is a recent feature, so if you see regressions on your machine, especially time related or even total hangs, this option is worth a try.

nohz=off

Disable the nohz feature. If your machine hangs, this option may help. Otherwise it is of no use.

When you have determined the right parameter combination, YaST automatically writes them to the boot loader configuration to make sure that the system boots properly next time.

If inexplicable errors occur when the kernel is loaded or during the installation, select Memory Test in the boot menu to check the memory. If Memory Test returns an error, it is usually a hardware error.

12.5 Fails to Launch Graphical Installer

After you insert the medium into your drive and reboot your machine, the installation screen comes up, but after you select Installation, the graphical installer does not start.

There are several ways to deal with this situation:

  • Try to select another screen resolution for the installation dialogs.

  • Select Text Mode for installation.

  • Do a remote installation via VNC using the graphical installer.

Procedure 12.3: Change Screen Resolution for Installation
  1. Boot for installation.

  2. Press F3 to open a menu from which to select a lower resolution for installation purposes.

  3. Select Installation and proceed with the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

Procedure 12.4: Installation in Text Mode
  1. Boot for installation.

  2. Press F3 and select Text Mode.

  3. Select Installation and proceed with the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

Procedure 12.5: VNC Installation
  1. Boot for installation.

  2. Enter the following text at the boot parameters prompt:

    vnc=1 vncpassword=SOME_PASSWORD

    Replace SOME_PASSWORD with the password to use for VNC installation.

  3. Select Installation then press Enter to start the installation.

    Instead of starting right into the graphical installation routine, the system continues to run in a text mode. The system then halts, displaying a message containing the IP address and port number at which the installer can be reached via a browser interface or a VNC viewer application.

  4. If using a browser to access the installer, launch the browser and enter the address information provided by the installation routines on the future SUSE Linux Enterprise Server machine and press Enter:

    http://IP_ADDRESS_OF_MACHINE:5801

    A dialog opens in the browser window prompting you for the VNC password. Enter it and proceed with the installation as described in Chapter 8, Installation Steps.

    Important
    Important: Cross-platform Support

    Installation via VNC works with any browser under any operating system, provided Java support is enabled.

    Provide the IP address and password to your VNC viewer when prompted. A window opens, displaying the installation dialogs. Proceed with the installation as usual.

12.6 Only Minimalist Boot Screen Started

You inserted the medium into the drive, the BIOS routines are finished, but the system does not start with the graphical boot screen. Instead it launches a very minimalist text-based interface. This may happen on any machine not providing sufficient graphics memory for rendering a graphical boot screen.

Although the text boot screen looks minimalist, it provides nearly the same functionality as the graphical one:

Boot Options

Unlike the graphical interface, the different boot parameters cannot be selected using the cursor keys of your keyboard. The boot menu of the text mode boot screen offers some keywords to enter at the boot prompt. These keywords map to the options offered in the graphical version. Enter your choice and press Enter to launch the boot process.

Custom Boot Options

After selecting a boot parameter, enter the appropriate keyword at the boot prompt or enter some custom boot parameters as described in Section 12.4, “Boot Failure”. To launch the installation process, press Enter.

Screen Resolutions

Use the function keys (F1 ... F12) to determine the screen resolution for installation. If you need to boot in text mode, choose F3.

12.7 Log Files

For more information about log files that are created during installation, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 42 “Gathering System Information for Support”, Section 42.5 “Gathering Information during the Installation”.

Part III Customizing Installation Images

13 Cloning Disk Images

This chapter describes how to use cloned images for installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. This process is mostly used in virtualized environments.

13.1 Overview

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server provides a script to clean up configuration that is unique to each installation. With the introduction of systemd, unique system identifiers are used and set in different locations and files. Therefore, cloning is no longer the recommended way to build system images. Images can be created with KIWI NG, see https://doc.suse.com/kiwi/.

To clone disks of machines, refer to the documentation of your virtualization environment.

13.2 Cleaning Up Unique System Identifiers

Warning
Warning: Important Configuration Loss

Executing the following procedure permanently deletes important system configuration data. If the source system for the clone is used in production, run the clean-up script on the cloned image.

To clean all unique system identifiers, execute the following procedure before or after cloning a disk image. If run on the clone, this procedure needs to be run on each clone. Therefore, we recommend to create a golden image that is not used in production and only serves as a source for new clones. The golden image is already cleaned up and clones can be used immediately.

For example, the clone-master-clean-up command removes:

  • Swap files

  • Zypper repositories

  • SSH host and client keys

  • Temporary directories, like /tmp/*

  • Postfix data

  • HANA firewall script

  • systemd journal

  1. Use zypper to install clone-master-clean-up:

    > sudo zypper install clone-master-clean-up
  2. Configure the behavior of clone-master-clean-up by editing /etc/sysconfig/clone-master-clean-up. This configuration file defines whether users with a UID larger than 1000, the /etc/sudoers file, software repositories for package installation, and Btrfs snapshots should be removed.

  3. Remove existing configuration and unique identifiers by running the script:

    > sudo clone-master-clean-up

14 Customizing Installation Images with mksusecd

mksusecd is a useful tool for creating a customized installation image. Use it to modify the regular SUSE Linux Enterprise installation images, adding and removing files, creating a minimal network installation image, customizing boot and repository options, and creating a minimal boot image as an alternative to booting a system from a PXE server.

14.1 Installing mksusecd

In SLE 15, mksusecd is in the Development Tools module. If this module is not enabled, you must enable it first. Find the exact module name and SUSEConnect activation command with zypper:

> zypper search-packages mksusecd
Following packages were found in following modules:

Package    Module or Repository
---------  -------------------------------------------------------------------
mksusecd   Development Tools Module (sle-module-development-tools/15.2/x86_64)

To activate the respective module or product, use SUSEConnect --product.
Use SUSEConnect --help for more details.

Enable the module with SUSEConnect:

> sudo SUSEConnect --product sle-module-development-tools/15.2/x86_64

Install mksusecd:

> sudo zypper in mksusecd

Run mksusecd --help to see a complete list of commands.

After you create your custom image, either burn it to a CD/DVD medium using your preferred disk-writing program, or create a bootable USB flash drive using the dd command. Make sure the device is not mounted, then run the following command:

# dd if=myinstaller.iso of=/dev/SDB bs=4M

Then your new bootable device is ready to use.

14.2 Creating a Minimal Boot Image

Use mksusecd to create a minimal boot image to start client machines from a CD/DVD or USB flash drive, in place of starting them from a PXE boot server. The minimal boot image launches the kernel and initrd, and then the remaining installation files are fetched from a local NFS server (see Section 16.1, “Setting Up an Installation Server Using YaST”).

Run the following command to create the minimal ISO image:

> sudo mksusecd --create min-install.iso \
--net=nfs://192.168.1.1:/srv/install/ARCH/OS_VERSION/SP_VERSION/cd1  \
/srv/tftpboot/EFI/ARCH/boot

Replace the NFS server address with your own. Replace ARCH with the directory corresponding to the target system architecture. Also replace OS_version and SP_VERSION (service pack) according to your paths in Section 16.1, “Setting Up an Installation Server Using YaST”.

14.3 Setting Default Kernel Boot Parameters

Rather than waiting for a boot prompt to enter your custom kernel boot parameters, configure them in a custom mksusecd image:

> sudo mksusecd --create install.iso \
--boot "textmode=1 splash=silent mitigations=auto"

Verify that your custom parameters loaded correctly after start-up by querying /proc:

> cat /proc/cmdline

14.4 Customizing Modules, Extensions, and Repositories

SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 supports Modules (not to be confused with kernel modules) and Extensions for different product components. These are add-ons to the default Basesystem, such as Development Tools, Desktop Applications, and SUSE Linux Enterprise Live Patching. For more information refer to the Modules and Extensions Quick Start guide.

With mksusecd you can create an installation image containing the additional Modules and Extensions you want. Start by querying existing images, like this example for SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 SP2:

> sudo mksusecd --list-repos SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso
Repositories:
  Basesystem-Module [15.2-0]
  SUSE-CAP-Tools-Module [15.2-0]
  Containers-Module [15.2-0]
  Desktop-Applications-Module [15.2-0]
  Development-Tools-Module [15.2-0]
  HPC-Module [15.2-0]
  Legacy-Module [15.2-0]
  Live-Patching [15.2-0]
  Public-Cloud-Module [15.2-0]
  Python2-Module [15.2-0]
  SAP-Applications-Module [15.2-0]
  Server-Applications-Module [15.2-0]
  Transactional-Server-Module [15.2-0]
  Web-Scripting-Module [15.2-0]
  SLEHA15-SP2 [15.2-0]
  SLE-15-SP2-HPC [15.2-0]
  SLED15-SP2 [15.2-0]
  SLES15-SP2 [15.2-0]
  SLE-15-SP2-SAP [15.2-0]
  SLEWE15-SP2 [15.2-0]
  [...]

Create a new installation image that is built from the Modules, Extensions, and repositories that you select, and automatically enable them:

> sudo mksusecd --create myinstaller.iso --enable-repos auto \
--include-repos Basesystem-Module,Desktop-Applications-Module \
SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso

This example creates an image for installation from the internet. To create an image for offline installation, additionally add the repository of the base product, for example SLES15-SP2 for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

> sudo mksusecd --create myinstaller.iso --enable-repos auto \
   --include-repos SLES15-SP2,Basesystem-Module,Desktop-Applications-Module \
   SLE-15-SP2-Full-ARCH-GM-media1.iso

Replace --enable-repos auto with --enable-repos ask to have the installer present a dialog for choosing modules.

Note
Note: AutoYaST Control File

When using the --enable-repos option, mksusecd adds an add_on_products.xml file for use with AutoYaST to the new image. Modules in this file do not need to be listed in the in the AutoYaST control file.

14.5 Creating a Minimal Netinstall ISO

To create a minimal installation image to launch a network installation, use the --nano option:

> sudo mksusecd --create netinstall.iso \
--nano SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso

14.6 Change Default Repository

To set a different repository, such as your own local repository, use the --net option:

> sudo mksusecd --create localinstall.iso \
--net "https://example.com/local" SLE-15-SP2-Online-ARCH-GM-media1.iso

15 Customizing Installation Images Manually

You can customize the standard SUSE Linux Enterprise installation images by editing a file in the installation ISO image, media.1/products. Add modules and extensions to create a single customized installation image. Then copy your custom image to a CD, DVD, or USB flash drive to create a customized bootable installation medium. See the SUSE Best Practices paper on How to Create a Custom Installation Medium for SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 for complete instructions.

Part IV Setting Up an Installation Server

16 Setting Up a Network Installation Source

This chapter describes how to create a server that provides the data required for installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server over the network.

Depending on the operating system of the machine used as the network installation source for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, there are several options for the server configuration. The easiest way to set up an installation server is to use YaST.

Tip
Tip: Installation Server Operating System

You can even use a Microsoft Windows machine as the installation server for your Linux deployment. See Section 16.5, “Managing an SMB Repository” for details.

16.1 Setting Up an Installation Server Using YaST

YaST offers a graphical tool for creating network repositories. It supports HTTP, FTP, and NFS network installation servers.

  1. Log in to the machine that should act as installation server.

  2. Install the package yast2-instserver:

    > sudo zypper in yast2-instserver
  3. Start YaST › Miscellaneous › Installation Server.

  4. Select the repository type (HTTP, FTP, or NFS). The selected service is started automatically every time the system starts. If a service of the selected type is already running on your system and you want to configure it manually for the server, deactivate the automatic configuration of the server service with Do Not Configure Any Network Services. In both cases, define the directory in which the installation data should be made available on the server.

  5. Configure the required repository type. This step relates to the automatic configuration of server services. It is skipped when automatic configuration is deactivated.

    Define an alias for the root directory of the FTP or HTTP server on which the installation data should be found. The repository will later be located under ftp://Server-IP/Alias/Name (FTP) or under http://Server-IP/Alias/Name (HTTP). Name stands for the name of the repository, which is defined in the following step. If you selected NFS in the previous step, define wild cards and export options. The NFS server will be accessible under nfs://Server-IP/Name. Details of NFS and exports can be found in Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 33 “Sharing File Systems with NFS”.

    Tip
    Tip: Firewall Settings

    Make sure that the firewall settings of your server system allow traffic on ports for HTTP, NFS, and FTP. If they currently do not, enable Open Port in Firewall or check Firewall Details first.

  6. Configure the repository. Before the installation media are copied to their destination, define the name of the repository (ideally, an easily remembered abbreviation of the product and version). YaST allows providing ISO images of the media instead of copies of the installation DVDs. If you want this, activate the relevant check box and specify the directory path under which the ISO files can be found locally. Depending on the product to distribute using this installation server, it might be necessary to add media, such as service pack DVDs as extra repositories. To announce your installation server in the network via OpenSLP, activate the appropriate option.

    Tip
    Tip: Announcing the Repository

    Consider announcing your repository via OpenSLP if your network setup supports this option. This saves you from entering the network installation path on every target machine. The target systems are booted using the SLP boot parameter and find the network repository without any further configuration. For details on this option, refer to Chapter 7, Boot Parameters.

  7. Configuring extra repositories. YaST follows a specific naming convention to configure add-on CD or service pack CD repositories. Configuration is accepted only if the repository name of the add-on CDs starts with the repository name of the installation media. In other words, if you chose SLES12SP1 as repository name for DVD1 then you should select SLES12SP1addon as repository name for DVD2.

  8. Upload the installation data. The most lengthy step in configuring an installation server is copying the actual installation media. Insert the media in the sequence requested by YaST and wait for the copying procedure to end. When the sources have been fully copied, return to the overview of existing repositories and close the configuration by selecting Finish.

    Your installation server is now fully configured and ready for service. It is automatically started every time the system is started. No further intervention is required. You only need to configure and start this service correctly manually if you deactivated the automatic configuration of the selected network service with YaST as an initial step.

To deactivate a repository, select the repository to remove then select Delete. The installation data are removed from the system. To deactivate the network service, use the respective YaST module.

If your installation server needs to provide the installation data for more than one product of the product version, start the YaST installation server module. Then select Add in the overview of existing repositories to configure the new repository.

Warning
Warning: YaST Installation Server Will Conflict with RMT Server

Configuring a server to be an installation server with YaST automatically installs and configures the Apache Web server, listening on port 80.

However, configuring a machine to be an RMT server (Repository Mirroring Tool) automatically installs the NGINX Web server and configures it to listen on port 80.

Do not try to enable both these functions on the same server. It is not possible for a single server to host both simultaneously.

16.2 Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually

Setting up an NFS source for installation is done in two main steps. In the first step, create the directory structure holding the installation data and copy the installation media over to this structure. Second, export the directory holding the installation data to the network.

To create a directory to hold the installation data, proceed as follows:

  1. Log in as root.

  2. Create a directory that will later hold all installation data and change into this directory. For example:

    # mkdir -p /srv/install/PRODUCT/PRODUCTVERSION
    # cd /srv/install/PRODUCT/PRODUCTVERSION

    Replace PRODUCT with an abbreviation of the product name and PRODUCTVERSION with a string that contains the product name and version (for example, /srv/install/SLES/15.1).

  3. For each installation medium contained in the media kit, execute the following commands:

    1. Copy the entire content of the installation medium into the installation server directory:

      # cp -a /media/PATH_TO_YOUR_MEDIA_DRIVE .

      Replace PATH_TO_YOUR_MEDIA_DRIVE with the actual path under which your installation media drive is addressed.

    2. Rename the directory to the medium number:

      # mv PATH_TO_YOUR_MEDIA_DRIVE DVDX

      Replace X with the actual number of your installation medium.

On SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, you can export the repository with NFS using YaST. Proceed as follows:

  1. Log in as root.

  2. Start YaST › Network Services › NFS Server.

  3. Select Start and Open Port in Firewall and click Next.

  4. Select Add Directory and browse for the directory containing the installation sources, in this case, PRODUCTVERSION.

  5. Select Add Host and enter the host names of the machines to which to export the installation data. Instead of specifying host names here, you could also use wild cards, ranges of network addresses, or the domain name of your network. Enter the appropriate export options or leave the default, which works fine in most setups. For more information about the syntax used in exporting NFS shares, read the exports man page.

  6. Click Finish. The NFS server holding the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server repository is automatically started and integrated into the boot process.

If you prefer manually exporting the repository via NFS instead of using the YaST NFS Server module, proceed as follows:

  1. Log in as root.

  2. Open the file /etc/exports and enter the following line:

    /PRODUCTVERSION *(ro,root_squash,sync)

    This exports the directory /PRODUCTVERSION to any host that is part of this network or to any host that can connect to this server. To limit the access to this server, use netmasks or domain names instead of the general wild card *. Refer to the export man page for details. Save and exit this configuration file.

  3. To add the NFS service to the list of servers started during system boot, execute the following commands:

    # systemctl enable nfsserver
  4. Start the NFS server with systemctl start nfsserver. If you need to change the configuration of your NFS server later, modify the configuration file and restart the NFS daemon with systemctl restart nfsserver.

Announcing the NFS server via OpenSLP makes its address known to all clients in your network.

  1. Log in as root.

  2. Create the /etc/slp.reg.d/install.suse.nfs.reg configuration file with the following lines:

    # Register the NFS Installation Server
    service:install.suse:nfs://$HOSTNAME/PATH_TO_REPOSITORY/DVD1,en,65535
    description=NFS Repository

    Replace PATH_TO_REPOSITORY with the actual path to the installation source on your server.

  3. Start the OpenSLP daemon with systemctl start slpd.

For more information about OpenSLP, refer to the package documentation located under /usr/share/doc/packages/openslp/ or refer to Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 36 “SLP”. For more Information about NFS, refer to Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 33 “Sharing File Systems with NFS”.

16.3 Setting Up an FTP Repository Manually

Creating an FTP repository is very similar to creating an NFS repository. An FTP repository can be announced over the network using OpenSLP as well.

  1. Create a directory holding the installation sources as described in Section 16.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”.

  2. Configure the FTP server to distribute the contents of your installation directory:

    1. Log in as root and install the package vsftpd using the YaST software management.

    2. Enter the FTP server root directory:

      # cd /srv/ftp
    3. Create a subdirectory holding the installation sources in the FTP root directory:

      # mkdir REPOSITORY

      Replace REPOSITORY with the product name.

    4. Mount the contents of the installation repository into the change root environment of the FTP server:

      # mount --bind PATH_TO_REPOSITORY /srv/ftp/REPOSITORY

      Replace PATH_TO_REPOSITORY and REPOSITORY with values matching your setup. If you need to make this permanent, add it to /etc/fstab.

    5. Start vsftpd with vsftpd.

  3. Announce the repository via OpenSLP, if this is supported by your network setup:

    1. Create the /etc/slp.reg.d/install.suse.ftp.reg configuration file with the following lines:

      # Register the FTP Installation Server
      service:install.suse:ftp://$HOSTNAME/REPOSITORY/DVD1,en,65535
      description=FTP Repository

      Replace REPOSITORY with the actual name of the repository directory on your server. The service: line should be entered as one continuous line.

    2. Start the OpenSLP daemon with systemctl start slpd.

Tip
Tip: Configuring an FTP Server with YaST

If you prefer to use YaST rather than manually configuring the FTP installation server, refer to Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 38 “Setting Up an FTP Server with YaST”.

16.4 Setting Up an HTTP Repository Manually

Creating an HTTP repository is very similar to creating an NFS repository. An HTTP repository can be announced over the network using OpenSLP as well.

  1. Create a directory holding the installation sources as described in Section 16.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”.

  2. Configure the HTTP server to distribute the contents of your installation directory:

    1. Install the Web server Apache as described in Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 37 “The Apache HTTP Server”, Section 37.1.2 “Installation”.

    2. Enter the root directory of the HTTP server (/srv/www/htdocs) and create the subdirectory that will hold the installation sources:

      # mkdir REPOSITORY

      Replace REPOSITORY with the product name.

    3. Create a symbolic link from the location of the installation sources to the root directory of the Web server (/srv/www/htdocs):

      # ln -s /PATH_TO_REPOSITORY/srv/www/htdocs/REPOSITORY
    4. Modify the configuration file of the HTTP server (/etc/apache2/default-server.conf) to make it follow symbolic links. Replace the following line:

      Options None

      with

      Options Indexes FollowSymLinks
    5. Reload the HTTP server configuration using systemctl reload apache2.

  3. Announce the repository via OpenSLP, if this is supported by your network setup:

    1. Create the /etc/slp.reg.d/install.suse.http.reg configuration file with the following lines:

      # Register the HTTP Installation Server
      service:install.suse:http://$HOSTNAME/REPOSITORY/DVD1/,en,65535
      description=HTTP Repository

      Replace REPOSITORY with the actual path to the repository on your server. The service: line should be entered as one continuous line.

    2. Start the OpenSLP daemon using systemctl start slpd.

16.5 Managing an SMB Repository

Using SMB, you can import the installation sources from a Microsoft Windows server and start your Linux deployment even with no Linux machine around.

To set up an exported Windows Share holding your SUSE Linux Enterprise Server repository, proceed as follows:

  1. Log in to your Windows machine.

  2. Create a new directory that will hold the entire installation tree and name it INSTALL, for example.

  3. Export this share according to the procedure outlined in your Windows documentation.

  4. Enter this share and create a subdirectory, called PRODUCT. Replace PRODUCT with the actual product name.

  5. Enter the INSTALL/PRODUCT directory and copy each medium to a separate directory, such as DVD1 and DVD2.

To use an SMB mounted share as a repository, proceed as follows:

  1. Boot the installation target.

  2. Select Installation.

  3. Press F4 for a selection of the repository.

  4. Choose SMB and enter the Windows machine's name or IP address, the share name (INSTALL/PRODUCT/DVD1, in this example), user name, and password. The syntax looks like this:

    smb://workdomain;user:password@server/INSTALL/DVD1

    After you press Enter, YaST starts and you can perform the installation.

16.6 Using ISO Images of the Installation Media on the Server

Instead of copying physical media into your server directory manually, you can also mount the ISO images of the installation media into your installation server and use them as a repository. To set up an HTTP, NFS or FTP server that uses ISO images instead of media copies, proceed as follows:

  1. Download the ISO images and save them to the machine to use as the installation server.

  2. Log in as root.

  3. Choose and create an appropriate location for the installation data, as described in Section 16.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”, Section 16.3, “Setting Up an FTP Repository Manually”, or Section 16.4, “Setting Up an HTTP Repository Manually”.

  4. Create subdirectories for each installation medium.

  5. To mount and unpack each ISO image to the final location, issue the following command:

    # mount -o loop PATH_TO_ISO PATH_TO_REPOSITORY/PRODUCT/MEDIUMX

    Replace PATH_TO_ISO with the path to your local copy of the ISO image. Replace PATH_TO_REPOSITORY with the source directory of your server. Replace PRODUCT with the product name and replace MEDIUMX with the type (CD or DVD) and number of media you are using.

  6. Repeat the previous step to mount all ISO images needed for your product.

  7. Start your installation server as usual, as described in Section 16.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”, Section 16.3, “Setting Up an FTP Repository Manually”, or Section 16.4, “Setting Up an HTTP Repository Manually”.

To automatically mount the ISO images at boot time, add the respective mount entries to /etc/fstab. An entry according to the previous example would look like the following:

PATH_TO_ISO PATH_TO_REPOSITORY/PRODUCTMEDIUM auto loop

17 Preparing Network Boot Environment

This chapter describes how to configure a DHCP and a TFTP server that provide the required infrastructure for booting with PXE.

SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server can be installed via a Preboot Execution Environment (PXE). The client hardware needs to support booting via PXE. The network needs to provide a DHCP server and a TFTP server providing the required data to the clients. This chapter guides you through setting up the required servers.

PXE only boots a kernel and initrd. This can be used to boot into an installation environment or into live systems. To set up the installation sources, see Chapter 16, Setting Up a Network Installation Source.

This section covers the configuration tasks needed in complex boot scenarios. It contains ready-to-apply configuration examples for DHCP, PXE boot, TFTP, and Wake on LAN.

The examples assume that the DHCP, TFTP and NFS server reside on the same machine with the IP 192.168.1.1. All services can reside on different machines without any problems. Make sure to change the IP addresses as required.

17.1 Setting Up a DHCP Server

A DHCP server provides both dynamic (Section 17.1.1, “Dynamic Address Assignment”) and static IP address assignments (Section 17.1.2, “Assigning Static IP Addresses”) to your network clients. It advertises servers, routes, and domains. For TFTP servers, DHCP also provides the kernel and initrd files. Which files are loaded depends on the architecture of the target machine, and whether legacy BIOS or UEFI boot is used. The clients transmit their architecture type in their DHCP requests. Based on this information, the DHCP server decides which files the client must download for booting.

Warning
Warning: PXE and AutoYaST Installation Failure

Starting with SUSE Linux Enterprise 15.0, there are special conditions that cause PXE boot and AutoYaST installations to fail. See Section 17.1.3, “PXE and AutoYaST Installation Failures” for more information and the solution.

17.1.1 Dynamic Address Assignment

The following example shows how to set up a DHCP server that dynamically assigns IP addresses to clients, and advertises servers, routers, domains, and boot files.

  1. Log in as root to the machine hosting the DHCP server.

  2. Enable the DHCP server by executing systemctl enable dhcpd.

  3. Append the following lines to a subnet configuration of your DHCP server's configuration file located under /etc/dhcpd.conf:

    # The following lines are optional
    option domain-name "my.lab";
    option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.1;
    option routers 192.168.1.1;
    option ntp-servers 192.168.1.1;
    ddns-update-style none;
    default-lease-time 3600;
    
    # The following lines are required
    option arch code 93 = unsigned integer 16; # RFC4578
    subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
     next-server 192.168.1.1;
     range 192.168.1.100 192.168.1.199;
     default-lease-time 3600;
     max-lease-time 3600;
     if option arch = 00:07 or option arch = 00:09 {
       filename "/EFI/x86/grub.efi";
     }
     else if option arch = 00:0b {
       filename "/EFI/aarch64/bootaa64.efi";
     }
     else  {
       filename "/BIOS/x86/pxelinux.0";
     }
    }

    This configuration example uses the subnet 192.168.1.0/24 with the DHCP, DNS and gateway on the server with the IP 192.168.1.1. Make sure that all IP addresses are changed according to your network layout. For more information about the options available in dhcpd.conf, refer to the dhcpd.conf manual page.

  4. Restart the DHCP server by executing systemctl restart dhcpd.

17.1.2 Assigning Static IP Addresses

A DHCP server may also assign static IP addresses and host names to network clients. One use case is assigning static addresses to servers. Another use case is restricting which clients may join the network to those with assigned static IP addresses, and providing no dynamic address pools.

Modify the above DHCP configuration according to the following example:

group {
 host test {
   hardware ethernet MAC_ADDRESS;
   fixed-address IP_ADDRESS;
   }
}

The host statement assigns a host name to the installation target. To bind the host name and IP address to a specific host, you must specify the client's hardware (MAC) address. Replace all the variables used in this example with the actual values that match your environment, then save your changes and restart the DHCP server.

17.1.3 PXE and AutoYaST Installation Failures

Starting with SUSE Linux Enterprise 15.0 and ISC DHCP 4.3.x, there are special circumstances that cause PXE boot and AutoYaST installations to fail. If your DHCP server does not have a pool of available dynamic IP addresses, but allows only pre-defined static addresses per client, and the clients send RFC 4361 client identifiers, then PXE/AutoYaST installations will not work. (Allowing only addresses assigned to specific network clients, and providing no dynamic address pools, prevents random machines from joining the network.)

When a new system starts in PXE, it sends a request to the DHCP server and identifies itself using a client identifier constructed from the hardware type plus the MAC address of the network interface. This is an RFC 2132 client-id. The DHCP server then offers the assigned IP address. Next, the installation kernel is loaded, and sends another DHCP request, but this client-id is different, and is sent in RFC 4361 format. The DHCP server will not recognize this as the same client, and will look for a free dynamic IP address, which is not available, and the installation stops.

The solution is to configure clients to send RFC 2132 client IDs. To send an RFC 2132 client-id during the installation, use linuxrc to pass the following ifcfg command:

ifcfg=eth0=dhcp,DHCLIENT_CLIENT_ID=01:03:52:54:00:02:c2:67,
DHCLIENT6_CLIENT_ID=00:03:52:54:00:02:c2:67

The traditionally-used RFC 2132 DHCPv4 client-id on Ethernet is constructed from the hardware type (01 for Ethernet) and followed by the hardware address (the MAC address), for example:

01:52:54:00:02:c2:67

The RFC 4361 DHCPv4 client-id attempts to correct the problem of identifying a machine that has more than one network interface. The new DHCPv4 client-id has the same format as the DHCPv6 client-id. It starts with the 0xff prefix, instead of the hardware type, followed by the DHCPv6 IAID (the interface-address association ID that describes the interface on the machine), followed by the DHCPv6 Unique Identifier (DUID), which uniquely identifies the machine.

Using the above hardware type-based and hardware address-based DUID, the new RFC 4361 DHCPv4 client-id would be:

  • Using the last bytes of the MAC address as the IAID: ff:00:02:c2:67:00:01:xx:xx:xx:xx:52:54:00:02:c2:67

  • When the IAID is a simple incremented number: ff:00:00:00:01:00:01:xx:xx:xx:xx:52:54:00:02:c2:67

The xx:xx:xx:xx field in the DUID-Link-Layer Timestamp (DUID-LLT) is a creation time stamp. A DUID-Link-Layer (DUID-LL) (00:03:00:01:$MAC) does not have a time stamp.

For more information on using linuxrc, see the AutoYaST Guide. Also see man 4 initrd, and the documentation for the options dhcp4 "create-cid", dhcp6 "default-duid" in man 5 wicked-config, wicked duid --help, and wicked iaid --help.

17.2 Setting Up a TFTP Server

The following procedure describes how to prepare the server so that the client machines with UEFI and BIOS can boot remotely using files exported by TFTP.

17.2.1 Installing a TFTP Server

To install a TFTP server, use the following procedure:

  1. Install the tftp package.

    > sudo zypper in tftp
  2. Review the tftpd configuration in /etc/sysconfig/tftp and add or change options as required. Refer to man 8 tftpd for more details. The TFTP daemon works without changing the configuration. The default root directory for the files is /srv/tftpboot.

  3. Ensure that tftpd is started at boot time, and restart it to read the new configuration.

    > sudo systemctl enable tftp.socket
    > sudo systemctl restart tftp.socket

17.2.2 Installing Files for Boot

SUSE Linux Enterprise Server provides the required files for booting via PXE on BIOS or UEFI machines. The following hardware architectures are supported:

  • AMD64/Intel 64

  • AArch64

  • POWER

  • IBM Z

Files required to boot from a specific hardware architecture are included in an RPM package. Install it on the machine running the TFTP server:

> sudo zypper in tftpboot-installation-SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE

Replace OS_VERSION with the version number of your SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation, for example SLE-15-SP2-x86_64, and replace ARCHITECTURE with the architecture of your system, for example x86_64. So the resulting text would look like this: tftpboot-installation-SLE-15-SP2-x86_64. Run zypper se tftpboot to search for all available versions and architectures.

The files will be installed in /srv/tftpboot/SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE. You can also copy the files for other versions and architectures of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server to the /srv/tftpboot directory.

Tip
Tip: Serving Different Architectures

The client and server hardware architecture can vary. For example, you can run an AMD64/Intel 64 TFTP server and provide a bootable environment for AArch64 client machines by installing the tftpboot-installation-SLE-15-SP2-aarch64 package.

Note
Note: Existing /srv/tftpboot/ Directory

If the directory /srv/tftpboot/ already exists on your machine, then all files will be installed to /usr/share/tftpboot-installation/. This is the case if you are upgrading your PXE server from a previous SLES release.

To fix this problem, copy the files manually from /usr/share/tftpboot-installation/ to /srv/tftpboot/. Alternatively, remove /srv/tftpboot/ and reinstall the tftpboot-installation-SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE package.

17.2.3 Configuring PXELINUX

Open the file /srv/tftpboot/SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE/net/pxelinux.cfg/default in an editor. Replace the path for the install parameter according to your setup as described in Chapter 16, Setting Up a Network Installation Source. Also replace TFTP_SERVER with the IP address of the TFTP server. For an overview of the PXELINUX configuration options, see Section 17.3, “PXELINUX Configuration Options”.

default linux

# install
label linux
  ipappend 2
  kernel boot/ARCHITECTURE/loader/linux
  append initrd=boot/ARCHITECTURE/loader/initrd instsys=tftp://TFTP_SERVER/SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE/boot/ARCHITECTURE/root install=PROTOCOL://SERVER_IP:/PATH

display  message
implicit 1
prompt  1
timeout  50

For details about the boot parameters that are used in the append line, see Section 7.3, “List of Important Boot Parameters”.

If required, edit the /srv/tftpboot/SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE/net/pxelinux.cfg/message to display a message in the boot menu.

17.2.4 Preparing PXE Boot for EFI with GRUB2

Normally, the GRUB2 configuration files require no modifications. However, the default settings do not include network resource for the installation system, This means that in order to perform a full SUSE Linux Enterprise Server installation via the network, you have to specify the install parameter in the linuxefi instruction of the /srv/tftpboot/SLE-OS_VERSION-ARCHITECTURE/EFI/BOOT/grub.cfg file. Refer to Section 7.3.3, “Specifying the Installation Source” for further information about the install parameter.

17.3 PXELINUX Configuration Options

The options listed here are a subset of all the options available for the PXELINUX configuration file.

APPEND OPTIONS

Adds one or more options to the kernel command line. These are added for both automatic and manual boots. The options are added at the very beginning of the kernel command line, usually permitting explicitly entered kernel options to override them.

APPEND -

Appends nothing. APPEND with a single hyphen as argument in a LABEL section can be used to override a global APPEND.

DEFAULT KERNEL_OPTIONS...

Sets the default kernel command line. If PXELINUX boots automatically, it acts as if the entries after DEFAULT had been typed in at the boot prompt, except the auto option is automatically added, indicating an automatic boot.

If no configuration file exists or no DEFAULT entry is defined in the configuration file, the default is the kernel name linux with no options.

IFAPPEND FLAG

Adds a specific option to the kernel command line depending on the FLAG value. The IFAPPEND option is available only on PXELINUX. FLAG expects a value, described in Table 17.1, “Generated and Added Kernel Command Line Options from IFAPPEND:

Table 17.1: Generated and Added Kernel Command Line Options from IFAPPEND

Argument

Generated Kernel Command Line / Description

1

ip=CLIENT_IP:BOOT_SERVER_IP:GW_IP:NETMASK

The placeholders are replaced based on the input from the DHCP/BOOTP or PXE boot server.

Note, this option is not a substitute for running a DHCP client in the booted system. Without regular renewals, the lease acquired by the PXE BIOS will expire, making the IP address available for reuse by the DHCP server.

2

BOOTIF=MAC_ADDRESS_OF_BOOT_INTERFACE

This option is useful to avoid timeouts when the installation server probes one LAN interface after another until it gets a reply from a DHCP server. This option allows an initrd program to determine from which interface the system has been booted. linuxrc reads this option and uses this network interface.

4

SYSUUID=SYSTEM_UUID

Adds UUIDs in lowercase hexadecimals, see /usr/share/doc/packages/syslinux/pxelinux.txt

LABEL LABEL KERNEL IMAGE APPEND OPTIONS...

Indicates that if LABEL is entered as the kernel to boot, PXELINUX should instead boot IMAGE and the specified APPEND options should be used. They replace the ones specified in the global section of the file, before the first LABEL command. The default for IMAGE is the same as LABEL and, if no APPEND is given, the default is to use the global entry (if any). Up to 128 LABEL entries are permitted.

PXELINUX uses the following syntax:

label MYLABEL
  kernel MYKERNEL
  append MYOPTIONS

Labels are mangled as if they were file names and they must be unique after mangling. For example, the two labels v2.6.30 and v2.6.31 would not be distinguishable under PXELINUX because both mangle to the same DOS file name.

The kernel does not need to be a Linux kernel. It can also be a boot sector or a COMBOOT file.

LOCALBOOT TYPE

On PXELINUX, specifying LOCALBOOT 0 instead of a KERNEL option means invoking this particular label and causes a local disk boot instead of a kernel boot.

Argument

Description

0

Perform a normal boot

4

Perform a local boot with the Universal Network Driver Interface (UNDI) driver still resident in memory

5

Perform a local boot with the entire PXE stack, including the UNDI driver, still resident in memory

All other values are undefined. If you do not know what the UNDI or PXE stacks are, specify 0.

TIMEOUT TIME-OUT

Indicates how long to wait at the boot prompt until booting automatically, in units of 1/10 second. The time-out is canceled when the user types anything on the keyboard, assuming the user will complete the command begun. A time-out of zero disables the time-out completely (this is also the default). The maximum possible time-out value is 35996 (just less than one hour).

PROMPT flag_val

If flag_val is 0, displays the boot prompt only if Shift or Alt is pressed or Caps Lock or Scroll Lock is set (this is the default). If flag_val is 1, always displays the boot prompt.

F2  FILENAME
F1  FILENAME
..etc...
F9  FILENAME
F10 FILENAME

Displays the indicated file on the screen when a function key is pressed at the boot prompt. This can be used to implement preboot online help (presumably for the kernel command line options). For backward compatibility with earlier releases, F10 can be also entered as F0. Note that there is currently no way to bind file names to F11 and F12.

17.4 Preparing the Target System for PXE Boot

Prepare the system's BIOS for PXE boot by including the PXE option in the BIOS boot order.

Warning
Warning: BIOS Boot Order

Do not place the PXE option ahead of the hard disk boot parameter in the BIOS. Otherwise this system would try to re-install itself every time you boot it.

17.5 Using Wake-on-LAN for Remote Wakeups

Wake-on-LAN (WOL) is an Ethernet standard for remotely waking up a computer by sending it a wakeup signal over a network. This signal is called the "magic packet". Install WOL on client machines to enable remote wakeups, and on every machine you want to use for sending the wakeup signal. The magic packet is broadcast over UDP port 9 to the MAC address of the network interface on the client machine.

When computers are shutdown they usually are not turned all the way off, but remain in a low power mode. When the network interface supports WOL it listens for the magic packet wakeup signal when the machine is powered off. You can send the magic packet manually, or schedule wakeups in a cron job on the sending machine.

17.5.1 Prerequisites

WOL works with both wired and wireless Ethernet cards that support it.

You may need to enable WOL in your system BIOS/UEFI.

Check your BIOS/UEFI settings for PXE boot, and make sure it is disabled to prevent accidental re-installations.

Adjust your firewall to allow traffic over UDP port 9.

17.5.2 Verifying Wired Ethernet Support

Run the following command to see if a wired Ethernet interface supports WOL:

> sudo ethtool eth0 | grep -i wake-on
Supports Wake-on: pumbg
Wake-on: g

The example output shows that eth0 supports WOL, indicated by the g flag on the Supports Wake-on line. Wake-on: g shows that WOL is already enabled, so this interface is ready to receive wakeup signals. If WOL is not enabled, enable it with this command:

> sudo ethtool -s eth0 wol g

17.5.3 Verifying Wireless Interface Support

Wakeup-over-wifi, or WoWLAN, requires a wireless network interface that supports WoWLAN. Test it with the iw, command, which is provided by the iw package:

> sudo zypper in iw

Find your device name:

> sudo iw dev
phy#0
        Interface wlan2
                ifindex 3
                wdev 0x1
                addr 9c:ef:d5:fe:01:7c
                ssid accesspoint
                type managed
                channel 11 (2462 MHz), width: 20 MHz, center1: 2462 MHz
                txpower 20.00 dBm

In this example, the device name to use for querying WoWLAN support is phy#0. This example shows that it is not supported:

> sudo iw phy#0 wowlan show
command failed: Operation not supported (-95)

This example shows an interface that supports WoWLAN, but it is not enabled:

> sudo iw phy#0 wowlan show
WoWLAN is disabled

Enable it:

> sudo iw phy#0 wowlan enable magic-packet
WoWLAN is enabled:
* wake up on magic packet

17.5.4 Installing and Testing WOL

To use WOL, install the wol package on the client and sending machines:

> sudo zypper in wol

Install wol-udev-rules on your client machines. This package installs a udev rule that enables WOL automatically at startup.

Get the MAC address of the network interface on the client machine:

> sudo ip addr show eth0|grep ether
link/ether 7c:ef:a5:fe:06:7c brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

In the example output, 7c:ef:a5:fe:06:7c is the MAC address.

Shut down your client machine, and send it a wakeup signal from another computer on the same subnet:

> wol 7c:ef:a5:fe:06:7c

When your target machine and second device are on the same network but in different subnets, specify the broadcast address for your target machine:

> wol -i 192.168.0.63 7c:ef:a5:fe:06:7c

Because WOL relies on broadcast domains the sending machine must be on the same network, though it can be in a different network segment.

It is possible to send the magic packet from a different network. One way is with port forwarding, if your router supports port forwarding to a broadcast address. A more secure method is to SSH to a host inside your network, and send the magic packet from there.

18 Setting up a UEFI HTTP Boot server

This chapter describes how to set up and configure a UEFI HTTP Boot server.

18.1 Introduction

HTTP Boot combines DHCP, DNS and HTTP to make it possible to boot and deploy systems over the network. HTTP Boot can be used as a high-performance replacement for PXE. HTTP Boot allows to boot a server from a URI over HTTP, quickly transferring large files, such as the Linux kernel and root file system, from servers outside of your local network.

18.1.1 Configuring the client machine

Enabling HTTP Boot on a physical client machine depends on your specific hardware. Consult the documentation for further information on how to enable HTTP Boot on your particular machine.

18.1.2 Preparation

The setup described here uses 192.168.111.0/24 (IPv4) and 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::/64 (IPv6) IP subnets and the server IP addresses are 192.168.111.1(IPv4) and 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1/64 (IPv6) as examples. Adjust these values to match your specific setup.

Install the following packages on the machine that you plan to use as a HTTP Boot server: dhcp-server, apache2 (or lighttpd), and dnsmasq.

18.2 Configuring the Server

18.2.1 DNS Server

While configuring the DNS server is optional, this does allow you to assign a user-friendly name to the HTTP Boot server. To set up the DNS server, add the following to the /etc/dnsmasq.conf file:

interface=eth0
addn-hosts=/etc/dnsmasq.d/hosts.conf

Assign a domain name to the IP addresses in the /etc/dnsmasq.d/hosts.conf file:

192.168.111.1 www.httpboot.local
2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1 www.httpboot.local

Start the DNS server.

systemctl start dnsmasq
Note
Note

Due to the change in UEFI 2.7, we recommend using a shim bootloader from SLE 15 or newer to avoid potential errors caused by the additional DNS node.

18.2.1.1 Configuring the DHCPv4 Server

Before setting up the DHCP servers, specify the network interface for them in /etc/sysconfig/dhcpd:

DHCPD_INTERFACE="eth0"
DHCPD6_INTERFACE="eth0"

This way, the DHCP servers provide the service on the eth0 interface only.

To set up a DHCPv4 server for both PXE Boot and HTTP Boot, add the following configuration to the /etc/dhcpd.conf file:

option domain-name-servers 192.168.111.1;
option routers 192.168.111.1;
default-lease-time 14400;
ddns-update-style none;
class "pxeclients" {
  match if substring (option vendor-class-identifier, 0, 9) = "PXEClient";
  option vendor-class-identifier "PXEClient";
  next-server 192.168.111.1;
  filename "/bootx64.efi";
}
class "httpclients" {
  match if substring (option vendor-class-identifier, 0, 10) = "HTTPClient";
  option vendor-class-identifier "HTTPClient";
  filename "http://www.httpboot.local/sle/EFI/BOOT/bootx64.efi";
}
subnet 192.168.111.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
  range dynamic-bootp 192.168.111.100 192.168.111.120;
  default-lease-time 14400;
  max-lease-time 172800;
}

Note that the DHCPv4 server must use the HTTPClient parameter for the vendor class ID, as the client uses it to identify an HTTP Boot offer.

Start the DHCP daemon:

systemctl start dhcpd

18.2.1.2 Configuring the DHCPv6 Server

To set up the DHCPv6 server, add the following configuration to /etc/dhcpd6.conf:

option dhcp6.bootfile-url code 59 = string;
option dhcp6.vendor-class code 16 = {integer 32, integer 16, string};
subnet6 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::/64 {
        range6 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::42:10 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::42:99;
        option dhcp6.bootfile-url "http://www.httpboot.local/sle/EFI/BOOT/bootx64.efi";
        option dhcp6.name-servers 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1;
        option dhcp6.vendor-class 0 10 "HTTPClient";
}

This configuration defines the type of the boot URL, the vendor class, and other required options. Similar to the DHCPv4 settings, it is necessary to provide the boot URL, which must have an IPv6 address. It is also necessary to specify the vendor class option. In DHCPv6, it consists of the enterprise number and the vendor class data (length and the content). Since the HTTP Boot driver ignores the enterprise number, you can set it to 0. The content of the vendor class data has to be HTTPClient; Otherwise, the client ignores the offer.

The older HTTP Boot implementation, which does not follow RFC 3315, requires a different configuration:

option dhcp6.bootfile-url code 59 = string;
option dhcp6.vendor-class code 16 = string;
        subnet6 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::/64 {
        range6 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::42:10 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::42:99;
        option dhcp6.bootfile-url "http://www.httpboot.local/sle/EFI/BOOT/bootx64.efi;
	option dhcp6.name-servers 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1;
	option dhcp6.vendor-class "HTTPClient";
}

Start the dhcpv6 daemon.

systemctl start dhcpd6
18.2.1.2.1 Setting up the DHCPv6 Server for Both PXE and HTTP Boot

Using the following configuration, it is possible to configure the DHCPv6 server for both PXE Boot and HTTP Boot:

option dhcp6.bootfile-url code 59 = string;
option dhcp6.vendor-class code 16 = {integer 32, integer 16, string};

subnet6 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::/64 {
        range6 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::42:10 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::42:99;

        class "PXEClient" {
	        match substring (option dhcp6.vendor-class, 6, 9);
	}

        subclass "PXEClient" "PXEClient" {
	        option dhcp6.bootfile-url "tftp://[2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1]/bootloader.efi";
	}

	class "HTTPClient" {
	        match substring (option dhcp6.vendor-class, 6, 10);
	}

	subclass "HTTPClient" "HTTPClient" {
	        option dhcp6.bootfile-url "http://www.httpboot.local/sle/EFI/BOOT/bootx64.efi";
		option dhcp6.name-servers 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1;
		option dhcp6.vendor-class 0 10 "HTTPClient";
	}
}

It is also possible to match the vendor class to a specific architecture, as follows:

class "HTTPClient" {
        match substring (option dhcp6.vendor-class, 6, 21);
	}

subclass "HTTPClient" "HTTPClient:Arch:00016" {
        option dhcp6.bootfile-url "http://www.httpboot.local/sle/EFI/BOOT/bootx64.efi";
	option dhcp6.name-servers 2001:db8:f00f:cafe::1;
	option dhcp6.vendor-class 0 10 "HTTPClient";
}

In this example, HTTPClient:Arch:00016 refers to a x86_64 HTTP Boot client. This configuration allows the server to serve different architectures simultaneously.

18.2.1.2.2 Configuring Firewall

If DHCPv6 packets are dropped by the RP filter in the firewall, check its log. In case it contains the rpfilter_DROP entry, disable the filter using the following configuration in /etc/firewalld/firewalld.conf:

IPv6_rpfilter=no

18.2.1.3 Deploying a TFTP server (Optional)

To provide support for both PXE Boot and HTTP Boot, deploy a TFTP server. Install the tftp and start the service:

 systemctl start tftp.socket
systemctl start tftp.service

It is also necessary to install a specific tftpboot-installation package for use with PXE Boot. Run the zypper se tftpboot command, to list of the available tftp-installation packages, then install the package for the desired system version and architecture, for example tftpboot-installation-SLE-15-SP2-x86_64 For example, tftpboot-installation-SLE-VERSION-x86_64 (replace VERSION with the actual version). Copy the content of the SLE-VERSION-x86_64 directory to the root directory of the TFTP server:

For more information, refer to /usr/share/tftpboot-installation/SLE-VERSION-x86_64/README

18.2.1.4 Setting up the HTTP Server

Copy the entire content of the first system ISO image to the /srv/www/htdocs/sle/ directory. Then edit the /srv/www/htdocs/sle/EFI/BOOT/grub.cfg file. Use the following example as a reference:

timeout=60
default=1

menuentry 'Installation IPv4' --class opensuse --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os {
    set gfxpayload=keep
    echo 'Loading kernel ...'
    linuxefi /sle/boot/x86_64/loader/linux install=http://www.httpboot.local/sle
    echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...'
    initrdefi /sle/boot/x86_64/loader/initrd
}

menuentry 'Installation IPv6' --class opensuse --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os {
    set gfxpayload=keep
    echo 'Loading kernel ...'
    linuxefi /sle/boot/x86_64/loader/linux install=install=http://www.httpboot.local/sle ipv6only=1 ifcfg=*=dhcp6,DHCLIENT6_MODE=managed
    echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...'
    initrdefi /sle/boot/x86_64/loader/initrd
}
18.2.1.4.1 Configuring lighttpd

To enable the support for both IPv4 and IPv6 in lighttpd, modify /etc/lighttpd/lighttpd.conf as follows:

##
## Use IPv6?
##
#server.use-ipv6 = "enable"
$SERVER["socket"] == "[::]:80" {  }

Start the lighttpd daemon:

systemctl start lighttpd
18.2.1.4.2 Configuring apache2

Apache requires no additional configuration. Start the apache2 daemon:

systemctl start apache2

18.2.1.5 Enabling SSL Support for the HTTP Server (Optional)

To use the HTTPS Boot, you need to convert an existing server certificate into the DER format and enroll it into the client's firmware.

Assuming you already have a certificate installed on your server, convert it into the DER format for use with the client using the following command:

openssl x509 -in CERTIFICATE.crt -outform der -out CERTIFICATE.der
18.2.1.5.1 Enroll The Server Certificate into the Client Firmware

The exact procedure of enrolling the converted certificate depends on the specific implementation of the client's firmware. For certain hardware, you have to enroll the certificate manually via the firmware UI using an external storage device with the certificate on it. Machines with Redfish support can enroll the certificate remotely. Consult the documentation for your specific hardware for more information on enrolling certificates.

18.2.1.5.2 Enabling SSL Support in lighttpd

Since lighttpd needs the private key and the certificate in the same file, unify them using the following command:

cat CERTIFICATE.crt server.key > CERTIFICATE.pem

Copy CERTIFICATE.pem to the /etc/ssl/private/ directory.

cp server-almighty.pem /etc/ssl/private/
chown -R root:lighttpd /etc/ssl/private/server-almighty.pem
chmod 640 /etc/ssl/private/server-almighty.pem

Make sure that mod_openssl is listed in the server.modules section of the /etc/lighttpd/modules.conf file, for example:

server.modules = (
  "mod_access",
  "mod_openssl",
)

Add the following lines to SSL Support section in /etc/lighttpd/lighttpd.conf:

# IPv4
$SERVER["socket"] == ":443" {
    ssl.engine                 = "enable"
    ssl.pemfile                = "/etc/ssl/private/server-almighty.pem"
}
# IPv6
$SERVER["socket"] == "[::]:443" {
    ssl.engine                 = "enable"
    ssl.pemfile                = "/etc/ssl/private/server-almighty.pem"
}

Restart lighttpd to activate SSL support:

systemctl restart lighttpd
18.2.1.5.3 Enabling SSL Support in Apache

Open the /etc/sysconfig/apache2 file and add the SSL flag as follows:

APACHE_SERVER_FLAGS="SSL"

Make sure that the ssl module is listed in APACHE_MODULES, for example:

Next, copy the private key and the certificate to the /etc/apache2/ directory.

cp server.key /etc/apache2/ssl.key/
chown wwwrun /etc/apache2/ssl.key/server.key
chmod 600 /etc/apache2/ssl.key/server.key
cp server.crt /etc/apache2/ssl.crt/

Create the ssl vhost configuration.

cd /etc/apache2/vhosts.d
cp vhost-ssl.template vhost-ssl.conf

Edit /etc/apache2/vhosts.d/vhost-ssl.conf to change the private key and the certificate:

SSLCertificateFile /etc/apache2/ssl.crt/server.crt
 SSLCertificateKeyFile /etc/apache2/ssl.key/server.key

Restart Apache to activate the SSL support:

systemctl restart apache2
18.2.1.5.4 Modify the DHCP configuration

Replace the http:// prefix with https:// in dhcpd.conf/dhcpd6.conf and restart the dhcp server.

systemctl restart dhcpd
systemctl restart dhcpd6

18.3 Booting the Client via HTTP Boot

If the firmware already supports HTTP Boot, plug in the cable and choose the correct boot option.

19 Deploying Customized Preinstallations

Rolling out customized preinstallations of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server to many identical machines spares you from installing each one of them separately and provides a standardized installation for the end users.

With YaST firstboot, create customized preinstallation images and determine the workflow for the final personalization steps that involve end user interaction (as opposed to AutoYaST, which allows completely automated installations).

Creating a custom installation, rolling it out to your hardware, and personalizing the final product involves the following steps:

  1. Prepare the master machine whose disk needs to be cloned to the client machines. For more information, refer to Section 19.1, “Preparing the Master Machine”.

  2. Customize the firstboot workflow. For more information, refer to Section 19.2, “Customizing the Firstboot Installation”.

  3. Clone the master machine's disk and roll this image out to the clients' disks. For more information, refer to Section 19.3, “Cloning the Master Installation”.

  4. Have the end user personalize the instance of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. For more information, refer to Section 19.4, “Personalizing the Installation”.

19.1 Preparing the Master Machine

To prepare a master machine for a firstboot workflow, proceed as follows:

  1. Insert the installation media into the master machine.

  2. Boot the machine.

  3. Perform a normal installation including all necessary configuration steps, and make sure to select the yast2-firstboot package for installation.

  4. To define your own workflow of YaST configuration steps for the end user or to add your own YaST modules to this workflow, proceed to Section 19.2, “Customizing the Firstboot Installation”. Otherwise proceed directly to Step 5.

  5. Enable firstboot as root:

    Create an empty file /var/lib/YaST2/reconfig_system to trigger firstboot's execution. This file will be deleted after the firstboot configuration has been successfully accomplished. Create this file using the following command:

    touch /var/lib/YaST2/reconfig_system
  6. Proceed to Section 19.3, “Cloning the Master Installation”.

19.2 Customizing the Firstboot Installation

Customizing the firstboot installation workflow may involve several different components. Customizing them is recommended. If you do not make any changes, firstboot performs the installation using the default settings. The following options are available:

To customize any of these components, modify the following configuration files:

/etc/sysconfig/firstboot

Configure various aspects of firstboot (such as release notes, scripts, and license actions).

/etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml

Configure the installation workflow by enabling or disabling components or adding custom ones.

Provide translations for such a customized installation workflow, as described in Section 19.2.6, “Providing Translations of the Installation Workflow”.

Tip
Tip: Alternative Location of the Control File

/etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml is the default path for the control file, installed by the yast2-firstboot package. If you need to define a different location for the control file, edit /etc/sysconfig/firstboot, and change the FIRSTBOOT_CONTROL_FILE variable to your preferred location.

If you want to customize more than the workflow components, refer to the control.xml documentation at http://doc.opensuse.org/projects/YaST/SLES11/tdg/inst_in_general_chap.html#product_control.

19.2.1 Customizing YaST Messages

By default, an installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server contains several default messages that are localized and displayed at certain stages of the installation process. These include a welcome message, a license message, and a congratulatory message at the end of installation. You can replace any of these with your own versions and include localized versions of them in the installation. To include your own welcome message, proceed as follows:

  1. Log in as root.

  2. Open the /etc/sysconfig/firstboot configuration file and apply the following changes:

    1. Set FIRSTBOOT_WELCOME_DIR to the directory path where you want to store the files containing the welcome message and the localized versions, for example:

      FIRSTBOOT_WELCOME_DIR="/usr/share/firstboot/"
    2. If your welcome message has file names other than welcome.txt and welcome_locale.txt (where locale matches the ISO 639 language codes such as cs or de), specify the file name pattern in FIRSTBOOT_WELCOME_PATTERNS. For example:

      FIRSTBOOT_WELCOME_PATTERNS="mywelcome.txt"

      If unset, the default value of welcome.txt is assumed.

  3. Create the welcome file and the localized versions and place them in the directory specified in the /etc/sysconfig/firstboot configuration file.

Proceed in a similar way to configure customized license and finish messages. These variables are FIRSTBOOT_LICENSE_DIR and FIRSTBOOT_FINISH_FILE.

Change the SHOW_Y2CC_CHECKBOX to yes if the user needs to be able to start YaST directly after performing the installation.

19.2.2 Customizing the License Action

You can customize the way the installation system reacts to a user's refusal to accept the license agreement. There are three different ways which the system could react to this scenario:

halt

The firstboot installation is aborted and the entire system shuts down. This is the default setting.

continue

The firstboot installation continues.

abort

The firstboot installation is aborted, but the system attempts to boot.

Make your choice and set LICENSE_REFUSAL_ACTION to the appropriate value.

19.2.3 Customizing the Release Notes

Depending on if you have changed the instance of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server you are deploying with firstboot, you probably need to educate the end users about important aspects of their new operating system. A standard installation uses release notes (displayed during one of the final stages of the installation) to provide important information to the users. To have your own modified release notes displayed as part of a firstboot installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Create your own release notes file. Use the RTF format as in the example file in /usr/share/doc/release-notes and save the result as RELEASE-NOTES.en.rtf (for English).

  2. Store optional localized versions next to the original version and replace the en part of the file name with the actual ISO 639 language code, such as de for German.

  3. Open the firstboot configuration file from /etc/sysconfig/firstboot and set FIRSTBOOT_RELEASE_NOTES_PATH to the actual directory where the release notes files are stored.

19.2.4 Customizing the Workflow

The provided /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml example, defines a standard workflow which includes the following enabled components:

  • Language Selection

  • Welcome

  • License Agreement

  • Time and Date

  • Users

  • Root Password

  • Finish Setup

Bear in mind that this workflow is just a template. You may adjust it properly, manually editing the firstboot configuration file /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml. This XML file is a subset of the standard control.xml file that is used by YaST to control the installation workflow. See Example 19.2, “Configuring the Workflow Section” to learn more about how to configure the workflow section.

For an overview about proposals, see Example 19.1, “Configuring the Proposal Screens”. This provides you with enough background to modify the firstboot installation workflow. The basic syntax of the firstboot configuration file (plus how the key elements are configured) is explained with this example.

Example 19.1: Configuring the Proposal Screens
    …
    <proposals config:type="list">1
        <proposal>2
            <name>firstboot_hardware</name>3
            <mode>installation</mode>4
            <stage>firstboot</stage>5
            <label>Hardware Configuration</label>6
            <proposal_modules config:type="list">7
                <proposal_module>printer</proposal_module>8
            </proposal_modules>
        </proposal>
        <proposal>
        …
        </proposal>
    </proposals>

1

The container for all proposals that should be part of the firstboot workflow.

2

The container for an individual proposal.

3

The internal name of the proposal.

4

The mode of this proposal. Do not make any changes here. For a firstboot installation, this must be set to installation.

5

The stage of the installation process at which this proposal is invoked. Do not make any changes here. For a firstboot installation, this must be set to firstboot.

6

The label to be displayed on the proposal.

7

The container for all modules that are part of the proposal screen.

8

One or more modules that are part of the proposal screen.

The next section of the firstboot configuration file consists of the workflow definition. All modules that should be part of the firstboot installation workflow must be listed here.

Example 19.2: Configuring the Workflow Section
    <workflows  config:type="list">
        <workflow>
            <defaults>
                <enable_back>yes</enable_back>
                <enable_next>yes</enable_next>
                <archs>all</archs>
            </defaults>
            <stage>firstboot</stage>
            <label>Configuration</label>
            <mode>installation</mode>
            … <!–– list of modules  ––>
            </modules>
        </workflow>
    </workflows>
    …

The overall structure of the workflows section is very similar to that of the proposals section. A container holds the workflow elements and the workflow elements all include stage, label and mode information (just as the proposals introduced in Example 19.1, “Configuring the Proposal Screens”). The most notable difference is the defaults section, which contains basic design information for the workflow components:

enable_back

Include the Back button in all dialogs.

enable_next

Include the Next button in all dialogs.

archs

Specify the hardware architectures on which this workflow should be used.

Example 19.3: Configuring the List of Workflow Components
    <modules  config:type="list">1
        <module>2
            <label>Language</label>3
            <enabled config:type="boolean">false</enabled>4
            <name>firstboot_language</name>5
        </module>
    <modules>

1

The container for all components of the workflow.

2

The module definition.

3

The label displayed with the module.

4

The switch to enable or disable this component in the workflow.

5

The module name. The module itself must be located under /usr/share/YaST2/clients.

To make changes to the number or order of proposal screens during the firstboot installation, proceed as follows:

  1. Open the firstboot configuration file at /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml.

  2. Delete or add proposal screens or change the order of the existing ones:

    • To delete an entire proposal, remove the proposal element including all its sub-elements from the proposals section and remove the respective module element (with sub-elements) from the workflow.

    • To add a new proposal, create a new proposal element and fill in all the required sub-elements. Make sure that the proposal exists as a YaST module in /usr/share/YaST2/clients.

    • To change the order of proposals, move the respective module elements containing the proposal screens around in the workflow. Note that there may be dependencies to other installation steps that require a certain order of proposals and workflow components.

  3. Apply your changes and close the configuration file.

You can always change the workflow of the configuration steps when the default does not meet your needs. Enable or disable certain modules in the workflow (or add your own custom ones).

To toggle the status of a module in the firstboot workflow, proceed as follows:

  1. Open the /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml configuration file.

  2. Change the value for the enabled element from true to false to disable the module or from false to true to enable it again.

    <module>
        <label>Time and Date</label>
        <enabled config:type="boolean">true</enabled>
        <name>firstboot_timezone</name>
    </module>
  3. Apply your changes and close the configuration file.

To add a custom made module to the workflow, proceed as follows:

  1. Create your own YaST module and store the module file module_name.rb in /usr/share/YaST2/clients.

  2. Open the /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml configuration file.

  3. Determine at which point in the workflow your new module should be run. In doing so, make sure that possible dependencies to other steps in the workflow are taken into account and resolved.

  4. Create a new module element inside the modules container and add the appropriate sub-elements:

    <modules config:type="list">
         …
         <module>
            <label>my_module</label>
            <enabled config:type="boolean">true</enabled>
            <name>filename_my_module</name>
         </module>
    </modules>
    1. Enter the label to be displayed on your module in the label element.

    2. Make sure that enabled is set to true to have your module included in the workflow.

    3. Enter the file name of your module in the name element. Omit the full path and the .rb suffix.

  5. Apply your settings and close the configuration file.

Tip
Tip: Finding Connected Network Interface For Auto-Configuration

If the target hardware may feature more than one network interface add the network-autoconfig package to the application image. network-autoconfig cycles through all available Ethernet interfaces until one is successfully configured via DHCP.

19.2.5 Configuring Additional Scripts

Firstboot can be configured to execute additional scripts after the firstboot workflow has been completed. To add additional scripts to the firstboot sequence, proceed as follows:

  1. Open the /etc/sysconfig/firstboot configuration file and make sure that the path specified for SCRIPT_DIR is correct. The default value is /usr/share/firstboot/scripts.

  2. Create your shell script, store it in the specified directory, and apply the appropriate file permissions.

19.2.6 Providing Translations of the Installation Workflow

Depending on the end user it could be desirable to offer translations of the customized workflow. Those translations could be necessary, if you customized the workflow by changing the /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml file, as described in Section 19.2.4, “Customizing the Workflow”.

If you have changed /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml and introduced string changes, generate a new translation template file (.pot file) and use the gettext tool chain to translate and finally install the translated files in the YaST locale directories (/usr/share/YaST2/locale) as compiled .mo files. Proceed as follows:

  1. Change the textdomain setting from:

    <textdomain>firstboot</textdomain>

    to, for example,

    <textdomain>firstboot-oem</textdomain>
  2. Use xgettext to extract the translatable strings to the translation template file (.pot file), for example to firstboot-oem.pot:

    xgettext -L Glade -o firstboot-oem.pot /etc/YaST2/firstboot.xml
  3. Start the translation process. Then package the translated files (.LL_code.po files) the same way as translations of the other projects and install the compiled firstboot-oem.mo files.

If you need translations for additional or changed YaST modules, provide translations within such a module itself. If you changed an existing module, make sure to change also its text-domain statement to avoid undesired side effects.

Tip
Tip: For More Information

For more information about YaST development, refer to https://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:YaST_development. Detailed information about YaST firstboot can be found at http://doc.opensuse.org/projects/YaST/SLES11/tdg/bk09ch01s02.html.

19.3 Cloning the Master Installation

Clone the master machine's disk using any of the imaging mechanisms available to you, and roll these images out to the target machines. For more information about imaging, see https://doc.suse.com/kiwi/.

19.4 Personalizing the Installation

As soon as the cloned disk image is booted, firstboot starts and the installation proceeds exactly as laid out in Section 19.2.4, “Customizing the Workflow”. Only the components included in the firstboot workflow configuration are started. All other installation steps are skipped. The end user adjusts language, keyboard, network, and password settings to personalize the workstation. After this process is finished, a firstboot installed system behaves as any other instance of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

Part V Initial System Configuration

  • 20 Setting Up Hardware Components with YaST
  • YaST allows you to configure hardware items such as audio hardware, your system keyboard layout or printers.

  • 21 Installing or Removing Software
  • Use YaST's software management module to search for software components you want to add or remove. YaST resolves all dependencies for you. To install packages not shipped with the installation media, add software repositories to your setup and let YaST manage them. Keep your system up-to-date by managing software updates with the update applet.

  • 22 Installing Modules, Extensions, and Third Party Add-On Products
  • Modules and extensions add parts or functionality to the system. This chapter covers their installation, scope, support status and lifecycle.

  • 23 Installing Multiple Kernel Versions
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server supports the parallel installation of multiple kernel versions. When installing a second kernel, a boot entry and an initrd are automatically created, so no further manual configuration is needed. When rebooting the machine, the newly added kernel is available as an additional boot parameter.

    Using this functionality, you can safely test kernel updates while being able to always fall back to the proven former kernel. To do this, do not use the update tools (such as the YaST Online Update or the updater applet), but instead follow the process described in this chapter.

  • 24 Managing Users with YaST
  • During installation, you could have created a local user for your system. With the YaST module User and Group Management you can add users or edit existing ones. It also lets you configure your system to authenticate users with a network server.

  • 25 Changing Language and Country Settings with YaST
  • This chapter explains how to configure language and country settings. You can change the language globally for the whole system, individually for certain users or desktops, or temporarily for single applications. Additionally, you can configure secondary languages and adjust the date and country settings.

20 Setting Up Hardware Components with YaST

YaST allows you to configure hardware items such as audio hardware, your system keyboard layout or printers.

Note
Note: Graphics Card, Monitor, Mouse and Keyboard Settings

Graphics card, monitor, mouse and keyboard can be configured with GNOME tools.

20.1 Setting Up Your System Keyboard Layout

The YaST System Keyboard Layout module lets you define the default keyboard layout for the system (also used for the console). Users can modify the keyboard layout in their individual X sessions, using the desktop's tools.

  1. Start the YaST System Keyboard Configuration dialog by clicking Hardware › System Keyboard Layout in YaST. Alternatively, start the module from the command line with sudo yast2 keyboard.

  2. Select the desired Keyboard Layout from the list.

  3. Try the selected keyboard layout in the Test text box.

  4. If the result is as expected, confirm your changes and close the dialog.

  5. The result is stored in the files /etc/vconsole.conf (for text consoles) and /etc/X11/xorg.conf.d/00-keyboard.conf (for X11).

  6. Advanced keyboard settings can be configured in System › Sysconfig Editor › Hardware › Keyboard. Here you can specify the keyboard rate and delay settings, and enable or disable NumLock, CapsLock, and ScrollLock. These settings are stored in /etc/sysconfig/keyboard.

20.2 Setting Up Sound Cards

YaST detects most sound cards automatically and configures them with the appropriate values. To change the default settings, or to set up a sound card that could not be configured automatically, use the YaST sound module. There, you can also set up additional sound cards or switch their order.

Warning
Warning

If you do not know all details about the setup of your sound system, do not change its settings manually. Instead, let your sound subsystem—PipeWire or PulseAudio— configure it for you. Use dedicated desktop application to switch audio devices. As a fallback, use the pavucontrol graphical application.

To start the sound module, start YaST and click Hardware › Sound. Alternatively, start the Sound Configuration dialog directly by running yast2 sound & as user root from a command line. If the sound module is not available, install it using the sudo zypper install yast2-sound command.

YaST sound configuration

The dialog shows all sound cards that were detected.

Procedure 20.1: Configuring Sound Cards

If you have added a new sound card or YaST could not automatically configure an existing sound card, follow the steps below. For configuring a new sound card, you need to know your sound card vendor and model. If in doubt, refer to your sound card documentation for the required information. For a reference list of sound cards supported by ALSA with their corresponding sound modules, see http://www.alsa-project.org/main/index.php/Matrix:Main.

During configuration, you can choose between the following setup options:

Quick Automatic Setup

You are not required to go through any of the further configuration steps—the sound card is configured automatically. You can set the volume or any options you want to change later.

Normal Setup

Allows you to adjust the output volume and play a test sound during the configuration.

Advanced setup with possibility to change options

For experts only. Allows you to customize all parameters of the sound card.

Important
Important: Advanced Configuration

Only use this option if you know exactly what you are doing. Otherwise leave the parameters untouched and use the normal or the automatic setup options.

  1. Start the YaST sound module.

  2. To configure a detected, but Not Configured sound card, select the respective entry from the list and click Edit.

    To configure a new sound card, click Add. Select your sound card vendor and model and click Next.

  3. Choose one of the setup options and click Next.

  4. If you have chosen Normal Setup, you can now Test your sound configuration and make adjustments to the volume. You should start at about ten percent volume to avoid damage to your hearing or the speakers.

  5. If all options are set according to your wishes, click Next.

    The Sound Configuration dialog shows the newly configured or modified sound card.

  6. To remove a sound card configuration that you no longer need, select the respective entry and click Delete.

  7. Click OK to save the changes and leave the YaST sound module.

Procedure 20.2: Modifying Sound Card Configurations
  1. To change the configuration of an individual sound card (for experts only!), select the sound card entry in the Sound Configuration dialog and click Edit.

    This takes you to the Sound Card Advanced Options where you can fine-tune several parameters. For more information, click Help.

  2. To adjust the volume of an already configured sound card or to test the sound card, select the sound card entry in the Sound Configuration dialog and click Other. Select the respective menu item.

    Note
    Note: YaST Mixer

    The YaST mixer settings provide only basic options. They are intended for troubleshooting (for example, if the test sound is not audible). Access the YaST mixer settings from Other › Volume. For everyday use and fine-tuning of sound options, use the mixer applet provided by your desktop or the alsasound command line tool.

  3. For playback of MIDI files, select Other › Start Sequencer.

  4. When a supported sound card is detected, you can install SoundFonts for playback of MIDI files:

    1. Insert the original driver CD-ROM into your CD or DVD drive.

    2. Select Other › Install SoundFonts to copy SF2 SoundFonts™ to your hard disk. The SoundFonts are saved in the directory /usr/share/sfbank/creative/.

  5. If you have configured more than one sound card in your system you can adjust the order of your sound cards. To set a sound card as primary device, select the sound card in the Sound Configuration and click Other › Set as the Primary Card. The sound device with index 0 is the default device and thus used by the system and the applications.

  6. By default, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server uses the PulseAudio sound system. This is an abstraction layer that helps to mix multiple audio streams, bypassing any restrictions the hardware may have. To enable or disable the PulseAudio sound system, click Other › PulseAudio Configuration. If enabled, PulseAudio daemon is used to play sounds. Disable PulseAudio Support to use something else system-wide.

The volume and configuration of all sound cards are saved when you click OK and leave the YaST sound module. The mixer settings are saved to the file /etc/asound.state. The ALSA configuration data is appended to the end of the file /etc/modprobe.d/sound and written to /etc/sysconfig/sound.

20.3 Setting Up a Printer

YaST can be used to configure a local printer connected to your machine via USB and to set up printing with network printers. It is also possible to share printers over the network. Further information about printing (general information, technical details, and troubleshooting) is available in Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 20 “Printer Operation”.

In YaST, click Hardware › Printer to start the printer module. By default it opens in the Printer Configurations view, displaying a list of all printers that are available and configured. This is especially useful when having access to a lot of printers via the network. From here you can also Print a Test Page and configure printers.

Note
Note: Starting CUPS

To print from your system, CUPS must be running. In case it is not running, you are asked to start it. Answer with Yes, or you cannot configure printing. In case CUPS is not started at boot time, you will also be asked to enable this feature. It is recommended to say Yes, otherwise CUPS would need to be started manually after each reboot.

20.3.1 Configuring Printers

Usually a USB printer is automatically detected. There are two possible reasons it is not automatically detected:

  • The USB printer is switched off.

  • Communication between printer and computer is not possible. Check the cable and the plugs to make sure that the printer is properly connected. If this is the case, the problem may not be printer-related, but rather a USB-related problem.

Configuring a printer is a three-step process: specify the connection type, choose a driver, and name the print queue for this setup.

For many printer models, several drivers are available. When configuring the printer, YaST defaults to those marked recommended as a general rule. Normally it is not necessary to change the driver. However, if you want a color printer to print only in black and white, you can use a driver that does not support color printing. If you experience performance problems with a PostScript printer when printing graphics, try to switch from a PostScript driver to a PCL driver (provided your printer understands PCL).

If no driver for your printer is listed, try to select a generic driver with an appropriate standard language from the list. Refer to your printer's documentation to find out which language (the set of commands controlling the printer) your printer understands. If this does not work, refer to Section 20.3.1.1, “Adding Drivers with YaST” for another possible solution.

A printer is never used directly, but always through a print queue. This ensures that simultaneous jobs can be queued and processed one after the other. Each print queue is assigned to a specific driver, and a printer can have multiple queues. This makes it possible to set up a second queue on a color printer that prints black and white only, for example. Refer to Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 20 “Printer Operation”, Section 20.1 “The CUPS Workflow” for more information about print queues.

Procedure 20.3: Adding a New Printer
  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. In the Printer Configurations screen click Add.

  3. If your printer is already listed under Specify the Connection, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, try to Detect More or start the Connection Wizard.

  4. In the text box under Find and Assign a Driver enter the vendor name and the model name and click Search for.

  5. Choose a driver that matches your printer. It is recommended to choose the driver listed first. If no suitable driver is displayed:

    1. Check your search term.

    2. Broaden your search by clicking Find More.

    3. Add a driver as described in Section 20.3.1.1, “Adding Drivers with YaST”.

  6. Specify the Default paper size.

  7. In the Set Arbitrary Name field, enter a unique name for the print queue.

  8. The printer is now configured with the default settings and ready to use. Click OK to return to the Printer Configurations view. The newly configured printer is now visible in the list of printers.

20.3.1.1 Adding Drivers with YaST

Not all printer drivers available for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are installed by default. If no suitable driver is available in the Find and Assign a Driver dialog when adding a new printer install a driver package containing drivers for your printers:

Procedure 20.4: Installing Additional Driver Packages
  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. In the Printer Configurations screen, click Add.

  3. In the Find and Assign a Driver section, click Driver Packages.

  4. Choose one or more suitable driver packages from the list. Do not specify the path to a printer description file.

  5. Choose OK and confirm the package installation.

  6. To directly use these drivers, proceed as described in Procedure 20.3, “Adding a New Printer”.

PostScript printers do not need printer driver software. PostScript printers need only a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file which matches the particular model. PPD files are provided by the printer manufacturer.

If no suitable PPD file is available in the Find and Assign a Driver dialog when adding a PostScript printer, install a PPD file for your printer:

Several sources for PPD files are available. It is recommended to first try additional driver packages that are shipped with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server but not installed by default (see below for installation instructions). If these packages do not contain suitable drivers for your printer, get PPD files directly from your printer vendor or from the driver CD of a PostScript printer. For details, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 20 “Printer Operation”, Section 20.8.2 “No Suitable PPD File Available for a PostScript Printer”. Alternatively, find PPD files at http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/openprinting/database/databaseintro, the OpenPrinting.org printer database. When downloading PPD files from OpenPrinting, keep in mind that it always shows the latest Linux support status, which is not necessarily met by SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

Procedure 20.5: Adding a PPD file for PostScript Printers
  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. In the Printer Configurations screen, click Add.

  3. In the Find and Assign a Driver section, click Driver Packages.

  4. Enter the full path to the PPD file into the text box under Make a Printer Description File Available.

  5. Click OK to return to the Add New Printer Configuration screen.

  6. To directly use this PPD file, proceed as described in Procedure 20.3, “Adding a New Printer”.

20.3.1.2 Editing a Local Printer Configuration

By editing an existing configuration for a printer you can change basic settings such as connection type and driver. It is also possible to adjust the default settings for paper size, resolution, media source, etc. You can change identifiers of the printer by altering the printer description or location.

  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. In the Printer Configurations screen, choose a local printer configuration from the list and click Edit.

  3. Change the connection type or the driver as described in Procedure 20.3, “Adding a New Printer”. This should only be necessary in case you have problems with the current configuration.

  4. Optionally, make this printer the default by checking Default Printer.

  5. Adjust the default settings by clicking All Options for the Current Driver. To change a setting, expand the list of options by clicking the relative + sign. Change the default by clicking an option. Apply your changes with OK.

20.3.2 Configuring Printing via the Network with YaST

Network printers are not detected automatically. They must be configured manually using the YaST printer module. Depending on your network setup, you can print to a print server (CUPS, LPD, SMB, or IPX) or directly to a network printer (preferably via TCP). Access the configuration view for network printing by choosing Printing via Network from the left pane in the YaST printer module.

20.3.2.1 Using CUPS

In a Linux environment CUPS is usually used to print via the network. The simplest setup is to only print via a single CUPS server which can directly be accessed by all clients. Printing via more than one CUPS server requires a running local CUPS daemon that communicates with the remote CUPS servers.

Important
Important: Browsing Network Print Queues

CUPS servers announce their print queues over the network either via the traditional CUPS browsing protocol or via Bonjour/DNS-SD. Clients need to browse these lists, so users can select specific printers to send their print jobs to. To browse network print queues, the service cups-browsed provided by the package cups-filters-cups-browsed must run on all clients that print via CUPS servers. cups-browsed is started automatically when configuring network printing with YaST.

In case browsing does not work after having started cups-browsed, the CUPS server(s) probably announce the network print queues via Bonjour/DNS-SD. In this case you need to additionally install the package avahi and start the associated service with sudo systemctl start avahi-daemon on all clients.

Procedure 20.6: Printing via a Single CUPS Server
  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. From the left pane, launch the Print via Network screen.

  3. Check Do All Your Printing Directly via One Single CUPS Server and specify the name or IP address of the server.

  4. Click Test Server to make sure you have chosen the correct name or IP address.

  5. Click OK to return to the Printer Configurations screen. All printers available via the CUPS server are now listed.

Procedure 20.7: Printing via Multiple CUPS Servers
  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. From the left pane, launch the Print via Network screen.

  3. Check Accept Printer Announcements from CUPS Servers.

  4. Under General Settings specify which servers to use. You may accept connections from all networks available or from specific hosts. If you choose the latter option, you need to specify the host names or IP addresses.

  5. Confirm by clicking OK and then Yes when asked to start a local CUPS server. After the server has started YaST will return to the Printer Configurations screen. Click Refresh list to see the printers detected so far. Click this button again, in case more printers are available.

20.3.2.2 Using Print Servers other than CUPS

If your network offers print services via print servers other than CUPS, start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer and launch the Print via Network screen from the left pane. Start the Connection Wizard and choose the appropriate Connection Type. Ask your network administrator for details on configuring a network printer in your environment.

20.3.3 Sharing Printers over the Network

Printers managed by a local CUPS daemon can be shared over the network and so turn your machine into a CUPS server. Usually you share a printer by enabling so-called browsing mode in CUPS. If browsing is enabled, the local print queues are made available on the network for listening to remote CUPS daemons. It is also possible to set up a dedicated CUPS server that manages all print queues and can directly be accessed by remote clients. In this case it is not necessary to enable browsing.

Procedure 20.8: Sharing Printers
  1. Start the YaST printer module with Hardware › Printer.

  2. Launch the Share Printers screen from the left pane.

  3. Select Allow Remote Access. Also check For computers within the local network and enable browsing mode by also checking Publish printers by default within the local network.

  4. Click OK to restart the CUPS server and to return to the Printer Configurations screen.

  5. Regarding CUPS and firewall settings, see https://en.opensuse.org/SDB:CUPS_and_SANE_Firewall_settings.

21 Installing or Removing Software

Use YaST's software management module to search for software components you want to add or remove. YaST resolves all dependencies for you. To install packages not shipped with the installation media, add software repositories to your setup and let YaST manage them. Keep your system up-to-date by managing software updates with the update applet.

Change the software collection of your system with the YaST Software Manager. This YaST module is available in two flavors: a graphical variant for X Window and a text-based variant to be used on the command line. The graphical flavor is described here—for details on the text-based YaST, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 4 “YaST in Text Mode”.

Note
Note: Confirmation and Review of Changes

When installing, updating or removing packages, any changes in the Software Manager are only applied after clicking Accept or Apply. YaST maintains a list with all actions, allowing you to review and modify your changes before applying them to the system.

21.1 Definition of Terms

The following terms are important for understanding installing and removing software in SUSE Linux Enterprise Server.

Repository

A local or remote directory containing packages, plus additional information about these packages (package metadata).

(Repository) Alias/Repository Name

A short name for a repository (called Alias within Zypper and Repository Name within YaST). It can be chosen by the user when adding a repository and must be unique.

Repository Description Files

Each repository provides files describing content of the repository (package names, versions, etc.). These repository description files are downloaded to a local cache that is used by YaST.

Product

Represents a whole product, for example SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server.

Pattern

A pattern is an installable group of packages dedicated to a certain purpose. For example, the Laptop pattern contains all packages that are needed in a mobile computing environment. Patterns define package dependencies (such as required or recommended packages) and come with a preselection of packages marked for installation. This ensures that the most important packages needed for a certain purpose are available on your system after installation of the pattern. If necessary, you can manually select or deselect packages within a pattern.

Package

A package is a compressed file in rpm format that contains the files for a particular program.

Patch

A fix or compilation of fixes released by SUSE to correct operation defects (program bugs) in SUSE products. A patch can contain one or multiple files to replace or enhance existing executables, programs, applications or documents.

A patch consists of one or more packages and may be applied by delta RPMs. It may also introduce dependencies to packages that are not installed yet.

Resolvable

A generic term for product, pattern, package or patch. The most commonly used type of resolvable is a package or a patch.

Delta RPM

A delta RPM consists only of the binary diff between two defined versions of a package, and therefore has the smallest download size. Before being installed, the full RPM package is rebuilt on the local machine.

Package Dependencies

Certain packages are dependent on other packages, such as shared libraries. In other terms, a package may require other packages—if the required packages are not available, the package cannot be installed. In addition to dependencies (package requirements) that must be fulfilled, some packages recommend other packages. These recommended packages are only installed if they are actually available, otherwise they are ignored and the package recommending them is installed nevertheless.

21.2 Registering an Installed System

If you skipped registration during installation or want to re-register your system, you can register the system at any time. Use the YaST module Product Registration or the command line tool SUSEConnect.

21.2.1 Registering with YaST

To register the system, start YaST and switch to Software, then Product Registration.

By default the system is registered with the SUSE Customer Center. If your organization provides local registration servers, you can either choose one from the list of auto-detected servers or provide the URL manually.

21.2.2 Registering with SUSEConnect

To register from the command line, use the command

> sudo SUSEConnect -r REGISTRATION_CODE -e EMAIL_ADDRESS

Replace REGISTRATION_CODE with the registration code you received with your copy of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server. Replace EMAIL_ADDRESS with the e-mail address associated with the SUSE account you or your organization uses to manage subscriptions.

To register with a local registration server, also provide the URL to the server:

> sudo SUSEConnect -r REGISTRATION_CODE -e EMAIL_ADDRESS --url "URL"

21.3 Using the YaST Software Manager

Start the software manager from the YaST Control Center by choosing Software › Software Management.

YaST Software management

21.3.2 Installing and Removing Packages or Patterns

Certain packages are dependent on other packages, such as shared libraries. On the other hand, some packages cannot coexist with others on the system. If possible, YaST automatically resolves these dependencies or conflicts. If your choice results in a dependency conflict that cannot be automatically solved, you need to solve it manually as described in Section 21.3.4, “Package Dependencies”.

Note
Note: Removal of Packages

When removing any packages, by default YaST only removes the selected packages. If you want YaST to also remove any other packages that become unneeded after removal of the specified package, select Options › Cleanup when deleting packages from the main menu.

  1. Search for packages as described in Section 21.3.1, “Searching Software”.

  2. The packages found are listed in the right pane. To install a package or remove it, right-click it and choose Install or Delete. If the relevant option is not available, check the package status indicated by the symbol in front of the package name—press ShiftF1 for help.

    Tip
    Tip: Applying an Action to All Packages Listed

    To apply an action to all packages listed in the right pane, go to the main menu and choose an action from Package › All in This List.

  3. To install a pattern, right-click the pattern name and choose Install.

  4. It is not possible to remove a pattern. Instead, select the packages of a pattern you want to remove and mark them for removal.

  5. To select more packages, repeat the steps mentioned above.

  6. Before applying your changes, you can review or modify them by clicking View › Installation Summary. By default, all packages that will change status, are listed.

  7. To revert the status for a package, right-click the package and select one of the following entries: Keep if the package was scheduled to be deleted or updated, or Do Not Install if it was scheduled for installation. To abandon all changes and quit the Software Manager, click Cancel and Abandon.

  8. When you are finished, click Accept to apply your changes.

  9. In case YaST found dependencies on other packages, a list of packages that have additionally been chosen for installation, update or removal is presented. Click Continue to accept them.

    After all selected packages are installed, updated or removed, the YaST Software Manager automatically terminates.

Note
Note: Installing Source Packages

Installing source packages with YaST Software Manager is not possible at the moment. Use the command line tool zypper for this purpose. For more information, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 6 “Managing Software with Command Line Tools”, Section 6.1.3.5 “Installing or Downloading Source Packages”.

21.3.3 Updating Packages

Instead of updating individual packages, you can also update all installed packages or all packages from a certain repository. When mass updating packages, the following aspects are generally considered:

  • priorities of the repositories that provide the package,

  • architecture of the package (for example, AMD64/Intel 64),

  • version number of the package,

  • package vendor.

Which of the aspects has the highest importance for choosing the update candidates depends on the respective update option you choose.

  1. To update all installed packages to the latest version, choose Package › All Packages › Update if Newer Version Available from the main menu.

    All repositories are checked for possible update candidates, using the following policy: YaST first tries to restrict the search to packages with the same architecture and vendor like the installed one. If the search is positive, the best update candidate from those is selected according to the process below. However, if no comparable package of the same vendor can be found, the search is expanded to all packages with the same architecture. If still no comparable package can be found, all packages are considered and the best update candidate is selected according to the following criteria:

    1. Repository priority: Prefer the package from the repository with the highest priority.

    2. If more than one package results from this selection, choose the one with the best architecture (best choice: matching the architecture of the installed one).

    If the resulting package has a higher version number than the installed one, the installed package will be updated and replaced with the selected update candidate.

    This option tries to avoid changes in architecture and vendor for the installed packages, but under certain circumstances, they are tolerated.

    Note
    Note: Update Unconditionally

    If you choose Package › All Packages › Update Unconditionally instead, the same criteria apply but any candidate package found is installed unconditionally. Thus, choosing this option might actually lead to downgrading some packages.

  2. To make sure that the packages for a mass update derive from a certain repository:

    1. Choose the repository from which to update as described in Section 21.3.1, “Searching Software” .

    2. On the right hand side of the window, click Switch system packages to the versions in this repository. This explicitly allows YaST to change the package vendor when replacing the packages.

      When you proceed with Accept, all installed packages will be replaced by packages deriving from this repository, if available. This may lead to changes in vendor and architecture and even to downgrading some packages.

    3. To refrain from this, click Cancel switching system packages to the versions in this repository. Note that you can only cancel this until you click the Accept button.

  3. Before applying your changes, you can review or modify them by clicking View › Installation Summary. By default, all packages that will change status, are listed.

  4. If all options are set according to your wishes, confirm your changes with Accept to start the mass update.

21.3.4 Package Dependencies

Most packages are dependent on other packages. If a package, for example, uses a shared library, it is dependent on the package providing this library. On the other hand, some packages cannot coexist, causing a conflict (for example, you can only install one mail transfer agent: sendmail or postfix). When installing or removing software, the Software Manager makes sure no dependencies or conflicts remain unsolved to ensure system integrity.

In case there exists only one solution to resolve a dependency or a conflict, it is resolved automatically. Multiple solutions always cause a conflict which needs to be resolved manually. If solving a conflict involves a vendor or architecture change, it also needs to be solved manually. When clicking Accept to apply any changes in the Software Manager, you get an overview of all actions triggered by the automatic resolver which you need to confirm.

By default, dependencies are automatically checked. A check is performed every time you change a package status (for example, by marking a package for installation or removal). This is generally useful, but can become exhausting when manually resolving a dependency conflict. To disable this function, go to the main menu and deactivate Dependencies › Autocheck. Manually perform a dependency check with Dependencies › Check Now. A consistency check is always performed when you confirm your selection with Accept.

To review a package's dependencies, right-click it and choose Show Solver Information. A map showing the dependencies opens. Packages that are already installed are displayed in a green frame.

Note
Note: Manually Solving Package Conflicts

Unless you are very experienced, follow the suggestions YaST makes when handling package conflicts, otherwise you may not be able to resolve them. Keep in mind that every change you make, potentially triggers other conflicts, so you can easily end up with a steadily increasing number of conflicts. In case this happens, Cancel the Software Manager, Abandon all your changes and start again.

Conflict Management of the Software Manager
Figure 21.1: Conflict Management of the Software Manager

21.3.5 Handling of Package Recommendations

In addition to the hard dependencies required to run a program (for example a certain library), a package can also have weak dependencies, that add for example extra functionality or translations. These weak dependencies are called package recommendations.

The way package recommendations are handled has slightly changed starting with SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP1. Nothing has changed when installing a new package—recommended packages are still installed by default.

Prior to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP1, missing recommendations for already installed packages were installed automatically. Now these packages will no longer be installed automatically. To switch to the old default, set PKGMGR_REEVALUATE_RECOMMENDED="yes" in /etc/sysconfig/yast2. To install all missing recommendations for already installed packages, start YaST › Software Manager and choose Extras › Install All Matching Recommended Packages.

To disable the installation of recommended packages when installing new packages, deactivate Dependencies › Install Recommended Packages in the YaST Software Manager. If using the command line tool Zypper to install packages, use the option --no-recommends.

21.4 Managing Software Repositories and Services

To install third-party software, add software repositories to your system. By default, the product repositories such as SUSE Linux Enterprise Server-DVD 15 SP2 and a matching update repository are automatically configured after you have registered your system. For more information about registration, see Section 8.7, “Registration” or Book “Upgrade Guide”, Chapter 4 “Upgrading Offline”, Section 4.8 “Registering Your System”. Depending on the initially selected product, an additional repository containing translations, dictionaries, etc. might also be configured.

To manage repositories, start YaST and select Software › Software Repositories. The Configured Software Repositories dialog opens. Here, you can also manage subscriptions to so-called Services by changing the View at the right corner of the dialog to All Services. A Service in this context is a Repository Index Service (RIS) that can offer one or more software repositories. Such a Service can be changed dynamically by its administrator or vendor.

Each repository provides files describing content of the repository (package names, versions, etc.). These repository description files are downloaded to a local cache that is used by YaST. To ensure their integrity, software repositories can be signed with the GPG Key of the repository maintainer. Whenever you add a new repository, YaST offers the ability to import its key.

Warning
Warning: Trusting External Software Sources

Before adding external software repositories to your list of repositories, make sure this repository can be trusted. SUSE is not responsible for any problems arising from software installed from third-party software repositories.

21.4.1 Adding Software Repositories

You can either add repositories from DVD/CD, a USB flash drive, a local directory, an ISO image or a network source.

To add repositories from the Configured Software Repositories dialog in YaST proceed as follows:

  1. Click Add.

  2. Select one of the options listed in the dialog:

    Adding a Software Repository
    Figure 21.2: Adding a Software Repository
    • To scan your network for installation servers announcing their services via SLP, select Scan Using SLP and click Next.

    • To add a repository from a removable medium, choose the relevant option and insert the medium or connect the USB device to the machine, respectively. Click Next to start the installation.

    • For the majority of repositories, you will be asked to specify the path (or URL) to the media after selecting the respective option and clicking Next. Specifying a Repository Name is optional. If none is specified, YaST will use the product name or the URL as repository name.

    The option Download Repository Description Files is activated by default. If you deactivate the option, YaST will automatically download the files later, if needed.

  3. Depending on the repository you have added, you may be prompted to import the repository's GPG key or asked to agree to a license.

    After confirming these messages, YaST will download and parse the metadata. It will add the repository to the list of Configured Repositories.

  4. If needed, adjust the repository Properties as described in Section 21.4.2, “Managing Repository Properties”.

  5. Confirm your changes with OK to close the configuration dialog.

  6. After having successfully added the repository, the software manager starts and you can install packages from this repository. For details, refer to Chapter 21, Installing or Removing Software.

21.4.2 Managing Repository Properties

The Configured Software Repositories overview of the Software Repositories lets you change the following repository properties:

Status

The repository status can either be Enabled or Disabled. You can only install packages from repositories that are enabled. To turn a repository off temporarily, select it and deactivate Enable. You can also double-click a repository name to toggle its status. To remove a repository completely, click Delete.

Refresh

When refreshing a repository, its content description (package names, versions, etc.) is downloaded to a local cache that is used by YaST. It is sufficient to do this once for static repositories such as CDs or DVDs